Saab 2003 9 5 Owners Manual 95us1m03

2015-09-08

: Saab Saab-2003-9-5-Owners-Manual-762924 saab-2003-9-5-owners-manual-762924 saab pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 288 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

1
Owner’s Manual
Saab 9-5, Model Year 2003
Safety 11
Security 41
Instruments and controls 55
Saab 9-5 Audio System 89
OnStar - Telematics 111
Interior equipment and trunk 123
Starting and driving 151
Car care and technical information 197
Maintenance and owner assistance 253
Specifications 257
Index 273
© Saab Automobile AB 2002
Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden
2
Introduction
This manual provides practical guidance on
driving and caring for your Saab.
The Saab 9-5 is available with the following
engine variants:
• 2.3t Ecopower
• 2.3 Turbo Ecopower
• 3.0t V6 Ecopower
Although this manual describes the most
important differences between model vari-
ants, it does not include precise specifica-
tions of the different variants. Some differ-
ences also occur to meet special legal
requirements in different countries.
Importation and distribution of Saab auto-
mobiles, spare parts and accessories are
handled exclusively by General Motors of
Canada Limited in Canada and by Saab
Cars USA, Inc. in the U.S.A.
We recommend that you read through the
manual before taking the car out for the first
time and that you keep it in the car for future
reference.
To find a specific item, use the overviews
given on pages 3–7. A list of contents is
given at the beginning of each section of the
manual, and there is also a comprehensive
index at the back of the book.
Supplied with the car is a Warranties and
Service Record booklet and a tire warranty
folder which specifies the regular mainte-
nance to be carried out. The book also
contains important warranty conditions.
Since the policy at Saab is one of continual
improvement, we retain the right to incorpo-
rate modifications and to alter specifications
during production without prior notice.
If you have any questions concerning your
car, its equipment, the warranty conditions
or the like, your Saab dealer will be pleased
to help.
Best wishes,
Saab Automobile AB
Saab Automobile AB does not accept liability for
any damage caused by the fitting of spare parts,
exchange parts or accessories that are not
approved by Saab Automobile AB.
The specifications, design particulars and illus-
trations included in the manual are not binding.
WARNING
WARNING texts warn against the danger
of injury if the specified instructions are
not followed.
NOTICE
NOTICE texts warn of potential damage
to the car if the recommendations are not
followed.
IB1734
3
Instrument panel
IB1080
Indicator and warning lights______ 56
Speedometer_________________ 63
Odometer and trip meter ________ 62
Fuel gauge___________________ 63
Temperature gauge ____________ 63
Parking lights____________ 71
High/low beam __________ 71
Daytime running lights_____ 71
Instrument illumination ____ 73
Changing bulbs__________ 214
Turn signal and lane change
indicators ______________ 73
High beam flasher________ 71
Cruise control ___________ 171
Front fog lights___________ 74
Ashtrays (accessory)___________ 135
Cigarette lighters (accessory) ____ 136
Saab Information Display (SID) ___ 65
Night panel___________________ 69
Clock _______________________ 70
Wipers and washers______ 75
Rear-window wiper (9-5
Wagon) _______________ 76
Rain sensing wipers (option) 75
Washers_______________ 213
Wipers and washers______ 212
Saab 9-5 Audio System ___ 89
Steering-wheel controls ___ 106
Hazard warning lights_____ 74
Automatic climate control
(ACC) ________________ 77
Air conditioning (ACC) ____ 242
Electric heating, front seats ______ 15
Ventilated front seats___________ 15
Steering-wheel controls ___ 106
Sentronic, manual mode ___ 167
4
Exterior
IB1736
Driving with a roof rack load______ 185
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory) 185
Maximum roof load ____________ 258
Rearview mirror _______________ 126
Hood _______________________ 198
Engine compartment: washing ___ 245
Central locking __________ 42
Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan __ 46
Tailgate, 9-5 Wagon ______ 47
Child safety locks ________ 45
Car alarm ______________ 48
Headlights _____________ 71
High/low beam __________ 71
Turn signal and lane change
indicators______________ 73
Headlight washers _______ 75
Changing bulbs _________ 214
Fuel gauge___________________ 63
Fuel filler flap _________________ 157
Refueling ____________________ 158
Economical motoring___________ 178
Fuel ________________________ 260
b
Tires pressure ________________ 268
Wheels and tires ______________ 267
Braking______________________ 172
Driving in cold weather__________ 179
Compact spare wheel __________ 236
Changing a wheel _____________ 237
Trunk _______________________ 139
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan __ 139
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon _ 142
Trunk Release Handle__________ 148
Spare wheel and tools__________ 149
Compact spare wheel __________ 236
Towing a trailer __________ 181
Towing the car___________ 189
Rear towing eye _________ 190
Headlights______________ 71
Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan 219
Rear lights clusters, 9-5
Wagon ________________ 221
Changing bulbs__________ 214
Sunroof ________________ 132
Washing the car _________ 244
Waxing and polishing _____ 245
Touching up the paint _____ 245
Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 246
5
Interior
IB581
Rearview mirrors ______________ 125
Door mirrors__________________ 125
Sun visors ___________________ 135
Safety belts ____________ 17
Airbag_________________ 32
Child safety ____________ 23
Child safety locks ________ 45
Safety belts ____________ 243
Glove compartment ______ 136
Manual transmission _____ 162
Automatic transmission ___ 163
Electric windows ______________ 131
Ignition switch ________________ 152
Starting the engine ____________ 153
Engine Break-In Period _________ 161
Driving in hot weather __________ 181
Driving in cold weather _________ 179
Parking _____________________ 195
Steering wheel adjustment _ 124
Airbag _________________ 33
Power steering fluid_______ 208
Steering-wheel controls ___ 106
Sentronic, manual mode ___ 167
Seats__________________ 12
Electric heating, front seats_ 15
Ventilated front seats______ 15
Safety belts _____________ 17
Child safety _____________ 23
Folding the rear seat, 9-5
Sedan ________________ 139
Folding the rear seat, 9-5
Wagon ________________ 142
Upholstery and trim_______ 243
Side airbags ____________ 36
Interior lighting________________ 134
Sunroof _____________________ 132
Dome light, front ______________ 223
6
Engine compartment,
4-cyl engine
IB1737
Engine ______________________ 202
Checking the oil level___________ 203
Oil changing__________________ 204
Engine oil, specification _________ 261
Braking______________________ 172
ABS brakes __________________ 173
Brake and clutch fluid___________ 207
Brake system_________________ 265
Brake pads___________________ 265
Fuses _________________ 226
Changing a fuse_________ 228
Relays ________________ 229
Table of fuses ___________ 226
Temperature gauge ______ 63
Driving in hot weather_____ 181
Driving in cold weather____ 179
Coolant________________ 206
Coolant capacity_________ 260
Power steering fluid_______ 208
Steering, technical data ___ 265
Wipers and washers______ 75
Washers_______________ 213
Washer jets ____________ 213
Jump starting _________________ 191
Battery ______________________ 209
Charging/replacing the battery____ 210
Manual transmission ___________ 162
Automatic transmission _________ 163
Automatic transmission,
technical data ________________ 264
Manual gearbox, technical data___ 264
Important considerations for driving 155
Turbo unit ___________________ 199
Engine, technical data __________ 260
Ignition switch ___________ 152
Drive belts ______________ 211
Spark plugs_____________ 263
Catalytic converter _______ 156
Warning labels __________ 8
V.I.N. number ___________ 269
Engine number __________ 269
Gearbox number _________ 269
Color code______________ 269
7
Engine compartment,
3.0t V6
IB1738
Warning labels __________ 8
V.I.N. number ___________ 269
Engine number __________ 269
Gearbox number ________ 269
Color code _____________ 269
Ignition switch ___________ 152
Drive belts ______________ 211
Spark plugs_____________ 263
Catalytic converter _______ 156
Important considerations for driving 155
Turbo unit ___________________ 199
Engine, technical data __________ 260
Automatic transmission _________ 163
Automatic transmission,
technical data ________________ 264
Braking______________________ 172
ABS brakes __________________ 173
Brake and clutch fluid___________ 207
Brake system_________________ 265
Brake pads___________________ 265
Jump starting _________________ 191
Battery ______________________ 209
Charging/replacing the battery____ 210
Fuses _________________ 226
Changing a fuse_________ 228
Relays ________________ 229
Table of fuses ___________ 226
Temperature gauge ______ 63
Driving in hot weather_____ 181
Driving in cold weather____ 179
Coolant________________ 206
Coolant capacity_________ 260
Power steering fluid_______ 208
Steering, technical data ___ 265
Wipers and washers______ 75
Washers_______________ 213
Washer jets ____________ 213
Engine ______________________ 202
Checking the oil level___________ 203
Oil changing__________________ 204
Engine oil, specification _________ 261
8
Battery
• No sparks, flames or smoking.
• Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
• Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns.
• Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast.
• Do not tip battery. Do not open battery.
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
Brake fluid
CLEAN FILLER CAP BEFORE
REMOVING. USE ONLY DOT 4
FLUID FROM SEALED
CONTAINER.
Radiator fan
The radiator fan can cut in even
after engine has been switched
off.
IB336
Drive belt
Moving belt. Do not
touch while engine
running.
A/C system
Refrigerant at high pressure.
Always drain the A/C system before undoing any
connections. Failure to follow prescribed procedures
can result in injury. System to be serviced by autho-
rized personnel only. See Workshop Service Manual
for correct procedures.
The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
Refrigerant: 825 g of R134a.
Refrigeration oil: 120cc of PAG ND-8 oil or
Saab 4759106 SK 20 oil
Warning labels
• AVOID SPARKS AND OPEN FLAMES,
NO SMOKING
• WEAR EYE PROTECTION
• KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
•ACID
• SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
• FLAMMABLE GAS
Coolant:
Never open when engine hot!
Jack (Text printed on jack)
Use on Saab 9-5 & 9-3.Use on level ground only.
Use vehicle support stands. Safe working load
2000 lbs. (1,000 kg). For more information see
your owner´s manual.
9
IB336
(This label only used in some countries)
Jack is designed only for changing a tire or
mounting tire snow chains.
Car must be level and the jack must be placed
on a firm and level ground.
Never crawl under the car when it is jacked up.
Jacking Instructions
1 Set parking brake and shift transmission to
park.
2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel
to be changed (See illustration).
3 Crank jack so that car begins to lift.
4 Remove center cap by inserting a screw
driver under cap and prying up.
5 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel
bolts one-half turn.
6 Raise car so that tire clears ground. Loosen
wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.
7 Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough
so wheel is not loose.
8 Lower car. Tighten wheel bolts in crosswise
order. (See illustration)
Observe max. speed limit for spare tire.
CANADA
USA
WARNING
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur.
• Children 12 and under can be killed by the air bag
• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front
• Sit as far back as possible from the air bag
• ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTRAINTS
Contact an authorized
Saab workshop if a
Xenon headlight requires
replacement. (Only cars
with Xenon headlights.)
Long loads
Always SECURE LOAD to prevent it from
shifting during transport.
An unsecured load could cause passenger
injuries in braking situations or in the event of
a crash.
Cover sharp edges with a protective wrap.
10
No sparks,
flames or
smoking. Buckle up
Use protective
goggles Airbag
Keep out of
reach of
children.
Electric
windows
Battery acid
contains
sulphuric acid.
Central
locking
Refer to the
Owner’s
Manual.
Never place a
rear-facing
child seat in
this seat.
Risk of
explosive gas.
Headlights Windshield
wipers
Direction
indicators Windshield
washers
Parking lights Defroster
Hazard
warning lights Rear window
heating
Front fog
lights Ventilation fan
Rear fog lights
Coolant
temperature Radiator fan
Battery
charging Fuel
Foot brake
Coolant level
Engine oil
pressure
ABS brakes
Examples of symbols that can be found in your car
11Safety
Safety
Seats ................................. 12
Head restraint................... 16
Safety belts....................... 17
Child safety....................... 23
Airbag................................ 33
IB1740
12 Safety
Seats
Both front seats are electrically operated.
On certain models the driver´s seat is
equipped with a memory function.
To facilitate getting into the car, both seats
can be adjusted when either of the front
doors is open.
For safety reasons, if the door is closed, the
seat can only be adjusted when the ignition
is ON.
Note, however, that both seats can be
adjusted for 30 seconds after both doors
have been closed.
The following seat adjustments can be
made to achieve a comfortable driving
position:
• height
• legroom
• backrest rake angle
• lumbar support
• head-restraint height
We recommend that adjustments to the
driver’s seat be performed in the following
order:
1height
2 legroom
3 seat tilt angle
4 backrest rake angle
Lastly, adjust the steering wheel (see page
124).
Side airbags
(see page 36).
Head restraint
(see page 16).
Height
To raise the seat, lift the lower control
straight up.
To lower the seat, press the lower control
down.
The same control can be used to adjust the
height of the front and rear edges of the seat
independently.
WARNING
The seats are actuated by powerful
motors. Bear this in mind when adjusting
the seat, and make sure that nothing gets
caught and damaged. Ensure that noth-
ing can be trapped when adjusting the
seat.
Bear in mind that children can be injured
if they play with the electrically-operated
seats.
Always remove the ignition key when you
leave the car to prevent personal injury
caused by the electrically adjustable
seats, for example, due to children play-
ing.
WARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat except
when the car is stationary.
IB401
13Safety
Legroom adjustment
To adjust the legroom, push the lower
control forward or back.
Backrest rake angle
To adjust the backrest, move the upper
control forward or back.
Lumbar support
Turn the smaller wheel for stepless adjust-
ment of the lumbar support.
WARNING
The backrest should be upright during
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or a
crash and in particular a rear-end colli-
sion.
IB402
IB403
IB1161
14 Safety
Programmable driver’s seat (certain
models only)
In certain models the driver´s seat is
equipped with a programmable memory
function. This function also includes the
door mirrors.
Adjust the seat and door mirrors.
To save the settings, press and hold the M
button and, at the same time, press one of
the preselect buttons (1, 2 or 3). The Saab
Information Display (SID) will chime to
confirm that the settings have been saved.
To recall the programmed settings, press
the appropriate preset button, whereupon
the seat and mirrors will be adjusted auto-
matically.
To change the settings stored in a preset
button, adjust the seat and mirrors as before
and save the new settings by pressing M
and the appropriate preset button.
To facilitate reversing, the passenger side
door mirror can be tilted down automati-
cally, e.g. to show the curb. To do this,
select reverse and press the tiny button
adjacent to the door-mirror control. When
you deselect reverse, the mirror will return
to its original setting automatically (see
page 125).
IB404
15Safety
Ventilated front seats
(standard on certain models/certain
markets)
Ventilated front seats, that enhance seating
comfort in hot weather, are available stan-
dard on 9-5 3.0t Arc models and as an
option on Aero models (certain markets).
Ventilated seats are equipped with two fans
that extract the moist air from between the
seat and the body.
The fans have three speeds and are OFF
when the switch is set to 0.
Electric heating, front seats
(option)
Both front seats have adjustable and ther-
mostat-controlled heating of the seat cush-
ion and backrest, available as an option.
Heating is adjustable in three stages. In
position 0 it is turned off.
Electrically heated seat cushions in
the rear seat (option on certain mod-
els))
Electrically heated seat cushions for the two
outer seats in the rear are available as an
option on certain models.
The ON/OFF control button for the cushion
heating is located on the back of the center
console.
The warming-up time varies with the
temperature outside.
The button has an integral indicator that is
illuminated when the heating is on.
IB405
IB406
IB407
16 Safety
Head restraint
The front seats in the Saab 9-5 are
equipped with Saab Active Head Restraints
(SAHRs). These reduce the risk of whiplash
injury if the car is hit from behind.
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
head restraint forward and upward, thus
limiting the backward movement of the
head.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
ated by body weight. The mechanism is built
into the top of the backrest, where it is
connected to the head restraint.
Therefore, the SAHR does not need to be
replaced after a minor rear-end crash.
The head restraint can be raised or lowered
and is adjustable in various positions.
• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
• Lowering: press the catch on the left-hand
side of the attaching point and press down
the head restraint.
Rear-seat head restraints
9-5 Sedan: The rear head restraints have
three adjustment positions for passenger
comfort.
They can also be folded down to increase
the driver’s rearward vision when the seat is
unoccupied.
9-5 Wagon: The height of the rear head
restraints can be adjusted by depressing
the catch on the left-hand collar in the same
way as the front head restraints.
WARNING
• Adjust the head restraint so that your
head is optimally supported and the
center of the head restraint is at ear
height, thus reducing the likelihood of
neck injury in a crash.
• Raise the head restraints in the seat
that are occupied.
IB460
IB400
17Safety
Safety belts
Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are
provided for all seats.
Research has established that it is just as
dangerous for rear seat passengers not to
wear their safety belts as it is for front seat
passengers.
Bear in mind that in certain states it is a legal
requirement for all occupants of the car to
wear a safety belt.
Safety-belt reminder
When the ignition is switched on, the ”fasten
belts” reminder will light up until the driver
fastens the safety belt. In addition an audi-
ble signal sounds for 6 seconds, or until the
driver fastens his belt.
WARNING
Safety belts must be worn at all times by
all car occupants.
Child safety, see page 23.
Check that the locking tongue is properly
locked in the belt lock.
WARNING
In the event of a crash, the rear-seat
passengers not wearing a seatbelt will
thrown forward against the front-seat
backrests. The stresses imposed on the
front seat passengers and belts are multi-
plied and can result in needless injury or
even death for all car occupants.
WARNING
Adjustments of the safety belt should be
done when the car is stationary so that
attention to traffic is not reduced.
IB409
FASTEN BELTS
18 Safety
Safety belt pretensioners
The belts of the front seats are fitted with
automatic pretensioners and force limiters.
These are activated in the event of a severe
frontal or rear-end crash and a side-on colli-
sion, provided that the safety belts are being
worn.
The pretensioners serve to reduce the
forward movement of the body by tension-
ing the belt. The force limiters reduce belt
loads on the body by "slackening" the safety
belt to absorb the body’s kinetic energy as
gradually as possible.
The safety belt pretensioners are not acti-
vated by vehicle rollover.
Correct position for safety belt
• The lap portion of the belt should be
pulled as tightly as comfortable and as
low as possible across the hips, so that it
is just touching the top of the thighs. The
shoulder belt should be well in on the
shoulder but not touching the neck.
• Check to ensure that the belt is not twisted
or rubbing against any sharp edges.
• There should not be any slack in the belt.
Pull the belt tight – particularly important
when thick outer clothing is worn.
• Refrain from tilting the backrest more than
necessary, as the safety belt provides
better protection when the seat is in the
more upright position.
• Only one person per safety belt!
• For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
the retractor will allow the wearer freedom
of movement. The retractor locks up auto-
matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are
applied hard or a crash occurs.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other
components must be inspected by an
authorized Saab dealer and replaced as
necessary.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself. Visit an autho-
rized Saab dealer for any necessary
repairs.
WARNING
Proper positioning of the safety belt is
extremely important. An out of position
safety belt can result in the wearer sliding
underneath the belt in a crash (submarin-
ing) and injury can result from the lap
portion cutting into the abdomen.
WARNING
If two people share a belt, they risk injury
by being crushed together in the event of
a crash.
IB410
Correctly positioned safety belt
19Safety
• Children who have grown out of a child
seat should be restrained by the car’s
standard three-point belts. Make sure that
the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cush-
ion may be necessary.
Front safety belts
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
Then grip the belt at the shoulder, pull it out
and, without letting go, allow the slack to be
taken up by the reel. Make sure that the belt
is well in on the shoulder.
Because the lower belt-anchorage points
are on the seat, the belt buckle follows the
movement of the seat during seat adjust-
ment.
To release the belt, press the red button on
the belt buckle, as illustrated.
See page 243 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
WARNING
Never fasten the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind the body or pull the
belt off the shoulder and under the arm.
IB411
To fasten the belt
IB412
Press the red button to release the belt
20 Safety
Belt height adjustment
The front safety belts and the outside belts
in the rear (9-5 Sedan) are equipped with
automatic height adjustment.
After fastening the belt, grasp it at chest
height, pull it out and, without letting go,
allow the slack to be taken up by the reel.
Make sure that the belt is well in on the
shoulder.
Safety belt use during pregnancy
Pregnant women must always wear a
safety belt to protect both themselves and
the unborn child.
The lap belt should be placed low, across
the hips and over the upper thighs.
IB414
21Safety
Safety belt, rear seat
Three-point safety belts are provided for all
three rear seat passengers.
Fasten the belt by pulling out the strap care-
fully and inserting the tongue in the lock.
Check that it is securely fastened.
Then grip the diagonal part of the strap near
the lock and pull the belt upwards towards
the shoulder to tighten the lap strap. The lap
strap should lie low over the hips.
The diagonal part should lie as far in on the
shoulder as possible.
To release the belt, press the red button on
the belt lock.
See page 243 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
WARNING
• Make sure that the belt does not
become trapped when the backrest is
folded down or raised (see page 139).
• If a cargo has to be placed on a seat,
it must be properly secured with the
safety belt. This reduces the risk of the
cargo being thrown about during hard
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury.
IB???IB415
Safety belt, rear seat
IB416
Securing an item on the rear seat
22 Safety
• Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
• Make sure you use the correct safety
belt buckle. The buckles for the center
and left-hand rear seats are close
together.
WARNING
Safety belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and should
be worn low across the front of the pelvis
or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section of the
belt across the abdominal area must be
avoided.
Safety belts should be adjusted as firmly
as possible, consistent with comfort, to
provide the protection for which they have
been designed. A loose belt will greatly
reduce the protection afforded to the
wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid contamina-
tion of the webbing with polishes, oils and
chemicals, and particularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried out using
mild soap and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
It is essential to replace the entire assem-
bly after it has been worn in a severe
impact even if damage to the assembly is
not obvious.
Belts should not be worn with straps
twisted.
Each belt assembly must only be used by
one occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt
around a child being carried on the occu-
pant´s lap.
No modifications or additions should be
made by the user which will either prevent
the safety belt adjusting device from oper-
ating to remove slack, or prevent the
safety belt assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
23Safety
Child safety Car safety tips Protect your children from getting
trapped in the trunk of a car
For Trunk Release Handle information see
page 46 and 148.
WARNING
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.
• Children must
always be suitably
restrained in the car.
All child restraints and
booster seats are
designed to be
secured in vehicle
seats by the lap belt of a lap-shoulder
belt or LATCH. If the child restraint is
not properly secured, a child can be
injured or killed in a crash.
• Children 12 and under can be killed by
the airbag.
• According to crash statistics, the
BACK SEAT is SAFER for properly
restrained children than the front seat.
• Sit as far back as possible from the air
bag.
WARNING
• Never leave your children unattended
in a car, even for a short time.
– Children can suffer heat stroke – per-
haps die – in a matter of minutes.
– Children can put the car into gear and
hurt themselves or others.
• At gas stations, take the keys from the
car while filling the tank.
• Never allow children to climb on top of
– or under motor vehicles.
• Always look for children before back-
ing your motor vehicle out of a garage
or driveway.
• To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,
never let a car idle in the garage.
• Supervise young children around
buckets of water while washing your
car. Small children can drown in
seconds in less than an inch of water.
WARNING
• Teach your children not to play in or
around cars.
• Watch your children when loading or
unloading the car so they don’t get
locked in by mistake.
• Always lock the doors and trunk of
your car, and keep the keys out of chil-
dren´s sight and reach.
• Keep the rear fold-down seats closed
to help prevent kids from getting into
the trunk from inside the car.
24 Safety
The same attention must be given to child
safety in the car as is given to adults.
Saab recommends rearward facing child
restraints.
Children travel most safely when properly
restrained, but restraints must be suitable
for the size of the child. Always follow the
child seat/booster cushion manufacturer´s
instructions when installing these devices in
your vehicle.
Make sure you are acquainted with the
legal requirements for seating children
in the car.
Make sure that it is possible to fit a child
restraint in accordance with the manufac-
turer’s child seat instructions.
When fitting child seats in cars you must
always read the instructions supplied by
the manufacturer. LATCH
LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers
for CHildren) consists of top tether and
lower anchorage (“ISOFIX”) for child
restraints in two outboard the rear seats.
ISOFIX are lower attachments located
where the seat and back cushions come
together. Top tethers are upper attach-
ments located on parcel shelf or torsion
beam, see page 27 and 28.
Saab recommends rearward facing child
restraints for children 3 and under.
IB1832
25Safety
LATCH installation
To facilitate the proper fitting of new
specially-designed child restraints, rigid
lower anchorages (ISOFIX) have been
installed to the vehicle that shall be used
with the top tether anchorages in the two
outboard rear seating positions. There is an
additional top tether anchorage for the
center rear seating position that is to be
used together with the safety belt.
LATCH is a U.S./Canadian government
standard for an uniform method of fitting
child restraints without using the standard
safety belts. Only certain child restraints are
equipped to utilize these rigid lower anchor-
ages behind where the seat cushion and
seat back come together. LATCH child
seats also utilize a top tether strap that is
found on some newer child seats that still
require installation with the standard safety
belts.
There are two bars attached to the car body
for each specially designed LATCH child
restraint. A small label is located on the seat
back just above the outer attachment bars
to facilitate installing the child restraint. The
label contains a circle and a rearward facing
child restraint.
1 Open the LATCH (ISOFIX)- lid (1) on
one of the designated outboard rear
seating position by pulling the strap
located on the lid and rotate (2) the lid
upwards. See illustration.
2 Place the child restraint on the seat
cushion.
3 Press the child restraint rearward into
the opening between the lid and the
cushion, lining up the restraint attach-
ment arms with the labels.
4 Follow the child restraint instructions to
confirm that both restraint arms are
properly attached to the bars.
5 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car
anchorage and tighten according to the
restraint instructions, see page 27 and
28.
6 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that restraint is securely attached
at both the lower anchorage bars and
the top tether strap.
IB1938
1
2
Open the LATCH-lid.
26 Safety
For the top tether, only use the strap
supplied with the child restraint.
Always follow the installation instructions
supplied with the child restraint.
The availability of LATCH child restraints
may be limited.
When fitting child seats in cars you must
always read the instructions supplied by
the car seat manufacturer.
IB1684
Rigid 2-point lower attachment with top
tether
IB1685
Semi-rigid 2-point lower attachment with
top tether
27Safety
Child tether anchorages for forward
facing child car seats
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
anchored according to Canadian and USA
laws.
If you have any questions regarding child
tether anchorages please contact your
Saab dealer.
9-5 Sedan:
1 Open the cover that is right behind the
child restraint. Make sure it locks.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the lower anchor-
ages (ISOFIX) or the safety belts as
described in the child restraint mounting
instruction.
4 Route the tether under the headrest.
5 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
6 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
7 Pull the child restraints to make a
second check that the restraints are
securely attached at both the lower
anchorages bars and the top tether
strap.
WARNING
Child tether anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
IB1698
Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf,
Saab 9-5 Sedan
28 Safety
9-5 Wagon:
1 Fold the backrest of the rear seat
forward, see page 139.
2 Fold the anchor that is right behind the
child restraint to its upright position.
3 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
4 Raise the head restraint to its upper
position and then route the tether under
the head restraint.
5 Attach the tether to the anchor.
6 Raise the backrest of the rear seat.
Make sure it locks properly.
7 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the safety belt or
lower anchorages (ISOFIX) as
described in the child restraint mounting
instruction on the previous page.
8 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
9 Pull the child restraints to make a
second check that the restraints are
securely attached at both the lower
anchorages bars and the top tether
strap.
It is not possible to route the tether through
the cargo net (accessory), if one is fitted.
Instead we recommend a cargo guard
(accessory).
WARNING
Make sure the child-restraint anchorages
are folded all the way up or down other-
wise it can obstruct locking the rear seat
backrest.
IB1352
Child tether anchorages, Saab 9-5 Wagon
29Safety
Lockable belt tongue
In fitting a child seat that is intended to be
secured in position by the lap portion of the
safety belt, make use of the locking function
of the buckle.
Locking the lap portion of the belt lessens
the risk that the seat will work loose while
the car is in motion.
The button for the locking function is located
on the back of the buckle.
1 Position the child seat in the back of the
car.
2 To activate the locking function, move
the locking button on the tongue of the
belt to the position marked
”CHILD SEAT” (item 1 in the figure) in
order to activate the locking function.
3 Secure the base of the child seat with
the lap portion of the safety belt in accor-
dance with the installation instructions
accompanying the child seat.
4 Grasp the shoulder part of the safety belt
and pull it upwards to tighten the lap
portion against the child seat.
5 Check for correct locking function by
pulling on the lap portion of the belt. The
belt must not unreel.
IB822
Locking the lap belt
1 Locked
2 Unlocked
30 Safety
Installation of child restraint using the
standard safety belt
Child restraints that are approved for rear-
ward facing installation in the rear seat can
be positioned in any of the three rear places.
If you intend to install another make of child
restraint make sure that it is possible to fit it
in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Saab recommends rearward facing child
restraints up to 3 years.
WARNING
Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
instructions on the use of this child
restraint system can cause your child to
strike the vehicle´s interior during a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING
A special accessory is available for lock-
ing the center armrest so that a child seat
can be installed in the middle seat. See
your Saab dealer for details.
When a rear-facing child seat is fitted in
the center position of the rear seat in the
Saab 9-5 Sedan the center armrest must
be secured in place with this strap. If this
is not done, the center armrest could
swing down in the event of a frontal crash
and cause injury to the child.
IB1204
Fitting the locking strap on the center
armrest, Saab 9-5 Sedan (not needed on
Wagon).
The locking strap is standard equipment
in certain markets.
31Safety
Integrated booster seat
(accessory)
The integrated booster seat in the back is
intended for children weighing 33–80 lbs.
(15–36 kg) and between 38 and 54 inches
(97 and 137 cm) tall.
When seated in the integrated booster seat,
the child must wear the standard three-point
safety belt.
Whatever the age or weight of the child, it is
vital that the safety belt be worn correctly.
The seat should always be kept clean and
intact to ensure that it continues to function
as intended.
Folding down
1 Pull the opening strap on the side of the
booster seat outwards to release the
catch securing the seat.
2 Fold down the booster seat cushion by
grasping the upper edge and pulling
outwards.
Fastening the safety belt
• Seat the child well back in the seat, snug
against the backrest.
• Pull out the safety belt smoothly and
insert the tongue in the lock. Check that it
is securely fastened.
• Ensure that the lap strap is positioned low
across the hips and that the diagonal
strap is well in on the shoulder, although
not touching the neck or in a position that
creates discomfort.
• For optimum protection, the safety belt
should be snug against the body. Pull the
diagonal strap towards the shoulder to
take up any slack.
• After fastening the belt, grasp the strap at
the shoulder, pull it out and, without letting
go, allow the slack to be taken up by the
reel. Make sure that the strap is well in on
the shoulder.
• Check that the belt runs freely between
the reel and the lock.
To fold the seat away
Fold back the seat and ensure that it is
locked in position.
WARNING
Never wear a safety belt with the diagonal
strap positioned behind your back or
slipped off the shoulder and under your
arm.
IB1915
1 2
32 Safety
WARNING
• Use only the vehicle’s lap and shoul-
der belt system when restraining the
child in the booster seat.
• The seat must not be modified or
changed in any way.
• Never leave a child unattended in the
car.
• The car’s regular head restraint must
always be turned 180° back to its orig-
inal position after the integrated
booster seat is folded away.
• Check to ensure that the belt is not
twisted or rubbing against any sharp
edges.
Label in integrated booster seat
33Safety
Airbag
The AIRBAG system comprises an airbag in
the steering wheel, a front passenger airbag
and side airbags in the front seats.
The system supplements the protection
provided by the safety belts to further
enhance the safety of the occupants.
If a fault is detected in the AIRBAG, the
AIR BAG warning light on the main instru-
ment panel will come on (see pages 58 and
38).
When the system is triggered by impact of a
frontal crash, the airbags in the steering
wheel and passenger side of the dash board
are inflated, after which they deflate through
vents in the back of the bags.
The front airbags are inflated in two stages.
Stage 1: process is a less severe, softer
inflation of the airbag. This stage is used in
lower force crashes, or if the seat is posi-
tioned close to the steering wheel or dash-
board.
Stage 2: process is a more forceful and
quicker inflation of the airbag. This stage is
used in more severe crashes and/or when
the seat adjustment is back a significant
distance from the steering wheel or dash-
board.
Note:
The sensor reacts differently depending on
whether or not the front seatbelts on the
driver’s and passenger sides are used. Situ-
ations can therefore arise where only one of
the airbags inflates.
The entire process takes less than
0.1 second – literally, faster than the blink-
ing of an eye.
These airbags are triggered only by moder-
ate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes.
They will not be activated by minor front-end
impacts, rear-end or side impacts, or by the
car rolling over.
WARNING
To reduce risk of injury:
•Always wear your safety belt.
•Always adjust your seat so that you
are as far back as possible but still
able to reach the steering wheel and
controls comfortably.
• Children 12 and under or shorter than
55 inches (140 cm) should always
travel in the rear as the vehicle is
equipped with an airbag on the
passenger side.
WARNING
• Even if the car is equipped with
AIRBAG, safety belts must still
always be worn by all occupants.
• Note that because an airbag inflates
and deflates extremely rapidly, it will
not provide protection against a
second impact occurring in the same
incident. Always use your safety belt.
• Always sit with the whole of your back
in contact with the backrest of the seat,
and with your seat as far back as is
practical. Otherwise you will be thrown
back against the backrest when the
airbag inflates which could cause you
injury or death. The airbag needs
room in which to inflate.
• Never attach anything to the steering
wheel or passenger side of the instru-
ment panel, as this could result in
injury if the airbag should inflate. The
same applies to anything you might
have in your mouth, such as a pipe, for
instance.
• Some components of the airbag will
be warm for a short time. In some
circumstances the airbag can cause
minor burns or abrasions to the body
when the airbag inflates/deflates.
34 Safety
• Never rest your hands or forearms on
the steering-wheel center padding.
• If the AIR BAG warning light remains
on after the car has been started or
comes on while you are driving, have
the car checked immediately by an
authorized Saab dealer. The warning
light could signify that the airbags may
not inflate in a crash, or they could
even inflate without a crash. See
page. 58.
IB417
Moment of impact.
The sensors detect
deceleration and send
a signal via the cen-
tral sensor to the gas
generator that inflates
the airbag.
The inflating airbag
cushions the driver.
Airbag now fully
inflated.
The airbag starts to
deflate.
IB419
Inflated airbag (driver side)
Inflation and deflation together take less than
0.1 second.
35Safety
IB1742
5
1
4
2
6
3
2
6
7
75
AIRBAG system with belt pretensioners
1 Central sensor
2 Belt pretensioners (for both front safety belts)
3 Steering wheel with integral airbag
4 Passenger airbag
5 Side-airbag sensor
6 Side airbag
7 Front sensors
IB1743
Accessories and other equipment must
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
these are where the airbags inflate in the
event of a crash.
36 Safety
Front passenger seat
The airbags are interconnected and have a
common warning light. The passenger
airbag module is housed in the fascia above
the glove compartment and is marked ”SRS
AIRBAG”. (SRS = Supplementary Restraint
System)
Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a
moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccu-
pied.
Side airbags
Side airbags are housed inside the back-
rests of the front seats and are designed to
protect the driver and front passenger in the
event of a side impact.
In a side impact, only the airbag on that side
will be activated, and only then if certain
predetermined conditions are met such as
the force and angle of the impact, the speed
of the car on impact, and at which point on
the car’s side the impact occurs.
The sensors, which are fitted in the front
doors, sense the rise in pressure caused by
the door panel being pressed in during an
WARNING
Never secure a rear-facing child seat in
the right front seat of a car equipped with
a passenger airbag. Inflation of the airbag
in the event of a crash could seriously
injure or kill a child.
WARNING
• Children 12 and
under can be killed by
the airbag
• The back seat is the
safest place for children
• Never allow a child to stand in front of
the seat or to sit on the lap of a
front-seat passenger. Serious injury or
death could result if the airbag is
inflated in a crash.
• Never place anything on the dash or in
front of the seat as, in addition to being
a hazard to passengers, this could
interfere with the function of the airbag
in the event of a crash. The same
applies to the mounting of accessories
on the dash.
• Keep feet on the floor – never put feet
up on the fascia, on the seat or out of
the window.
• Do not carry anything in your lap.
IB420
Passenger airbag and driver’s airbag both
inflated
37Safety
impact condition. The side airbag trigger will
be commanded based on the characteris-
tics of this pressure rise.
WARNING
• This car is equipped with side airbags
and no extra interior trim should be
fitted. Failure to observe this warning
could result in the side airbags not
inflating as intended and thus not
providing the intended protection
either.
• Never place any object in the area that
would be occupied by the inflated
airbag.
• For optimum protection, sit upright in
the seat, with your safety belt correctly
fastened.
• The sensors for the side airbags are
fitted in the front doors. We advise
against doing any work on the doors
that could affect the moisture barrier in
the door or the airbag sensors. It is
essential that the moisture barrier
(thick plastic film) in the front door is
not damaged in any way.
• Improvement of the anticorrosion
treatment of the doors should only be
carried out by an authorized Saab
dealer. Otherwise there is a risk that
the side impact sensor and the mois-
ture barrier in the front door could be
damaged.
IB1182
Side airbag inflated
IB1707
Side airbag components
1 Side airbag
2 Sensor
3 Moisture barrier
4 Text on seat
38 Safety
Crash sensing
Crash sensing and diagnostic modules
have been used in many automobiles since
air bags were first produced. The technical
information gained from these modules can
be useful to understanding the circum-
stances that led to the air bag deployment.
In addition, information from many field
events can be used in the aggregate to help
manufactures and others better understand
real world crashes. This, in turn, can lead to
improved automotive safety.
Your vehicle is equipped with two electronic
frontal sensors, which helps the sensing
system distinguish between a moderate
frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. Your vehicle is also equipped with a
crash sensing and diagnostic module,
which records information about the frontal
air bag system. The module records infor-
mation about the readiness of the system,
when the system commands air bag infla-
tion and driver´s safety belt usage at deploy-
ment or in a near-deployment crash. The
module also records speed, engine rpm,
brake and throttle data etc.
AIR BAG warning light
AIRBAG servicing
The AIRBAG must be inspected as part of
the normal service program but otherwise
may be regarded as maintenance-free.
• The side airbags will inflate only in the
event of a side impact; not in the event
of a front or rear-end crash or of the
car’s rolling over.
• Damage or wear to the seat cover, or
the seat seam, in the area of the side
airbag must immediately be repaired
by an authorized Saab dealer.
• Do not modify the speaker installation
in the front doors or install speakers
other than those specifically approved
by Saab.
WARNING
• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the air bag system may not be working
properly. See page. 58. The airbags
in your vehicle may not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate with-
out a crash.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
39Safety
Scrapping or working on airbags
and belt pretensioners Frequently asked questions on func-
tion of airbags
Do you still need to wear a
safety b
elt if
airbags are fitted?
Yes, always! The airbag merely supple-
ments the car’s normal safety system.
Moreover, the airbag will only be actuated in
a moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
crash, which means, of course, that it
provides no protection in minor frontal
crashes, major rear-end or side-on crashes
or if the car rolls over.
The safety belts help reduce the chance of
the car occupants from being thrown around
and injured or killed inside the car.
But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs
in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag
will make the optimum contact with the
occupant, i.e. square on from the front. If the
occupant meets the airbag in an offset posi-
tion, the protection afforded will be reduced.
In addition, airbags provide no protection
against a secondary impact occurring in the
same incident. So there is no doubt about
the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
times.
Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
room to inflate.
The airbag inflates very quickly and power-
fully in order to protect an adult person,
before they are thrown forward, in a serious
frontal crash.
How do I position the seat to leave room for
the airbag to inflate?
Don’t have your seat too far forward.
Recline the seat back to increase the
distance between you and the airbag. For
short drivers, special accessory pedal
extensions are available through your Saab
dealer.
Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
great force – to be fast enough to protect an
adult in the seat.
When do the front airbags inflate?
The airbag will only be inflated under certain
predetermined conditions in a moderate to
severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,
depending on such factors as the force and
angle of the impact, the speed of the car on
impact, and the resistance to deformation of
the impacting object.
The airbag can only be activated once in the
same incident.
Do not attempt to drive the car after an
airbag has been inflated, even if it is possi-
ble.
WARNING
• Under no circumstances should any
modifications be made that affect the
steering wheel or the airbag’s electri-
cal circuitry.
• Before starting any welding work on
the car, always disconnect the nega-
tive (–) battery lead and cover the
conductor.
• Airbags and belt pretensioners must
be deployed under controlled condi-
tions before the car is scrapped or any
of the system’s components are
removed. Airbags or belt pretension-
ers that have been deployed as a
result of a crash must be replaced by
new ones.
• Airbag-system components must
never be transferred for use in another
vehicle.
• All work involving the scrapping or
replacement of airbags or belt preten-
sioners must only be carried out by
knowledgeable personnel.
40 Safety
What won’t trigger the front airbags?
The airbag will not be activated in all
front-end crashes. For instance, if the car
has hit something relatively soft and yielding
(e.g. a snow drift or a hedge) or a solid
object at a low impact speed, the airbag will
not necessarily be triggered.
How loud is the inflation?
The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,
but it is very short-lived and will not damage
your hearing. For a short time afterwards
you could experience a buzzing noise in
your ears.
Most people who have experienced it
cannot remember the noise of the inflation
at all – all they remember is the noise of the
crash.
Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
passenger airbag is installed?
Definitely not!
Children 12 and under can be injured or
killed by the airbag.
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for
children.
NEVER put a child seat in the front.
Are the smoke and fumes given off when the
airbag operates at all harmful?
Most people who have remained in a car
with little or no ventilation for several
minutes complained only of minor irritation
of the throat and eyes. Avoid as far as possi-
ble getting dust on your skin as there is a risk
of skin irritation.
If you suffer from asthma, the incident may
bring on an attack, in which case you should
follow the normal procedure advised by
your doctor. It is advisable to consult a
doctor afterwards.
What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning
light comes on?
If the warning light is on, it means that a fault
has been detected in the system. The
airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
intended and it might even be activated
erroneously. You should therefore take the
car to an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
When an airbag is inflated there is dust in
the air.
Because the dust/smoke can, in certain
cases, cause irritation to the skin, the
following precautions should be taken:
• As soon as possible, wash any
exposed skin using a mild soap and
water.
• If there is irritation of the eyes, flush
them liberally with clean water for at
least 20 minutes.
• If this trouble persists, you should
consult a doctor.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of head injuries in the
event of a crash, the headliner and pillar
trims incorporate energy absorbing mate-
rial. These areas must not be modified in
any way. Work on these areas must only
be carried out at an authorized Saab
dealer.
41Security
Security
Doors................................... 42
Central locking................... 42
Car alarm ............................ 48
IB446
42 Security
Doors
Door handles
Pull the handle to open the door.
If the door is stuck (e.g. if frozen), hold the
handle from above to secure a better grip.
Central locking
Key / Remote control
The key unit consists of a mechanical key
with integrated remote control.
The mechanical key is used for manual
locking and unlocking.
The remote control is used for remote lock-
ing and unlocking.
The key fits all the car’s locks.
The key supplied with the car has a code
number on a black plastic tag that needs to
be quoted for ordering additional keys. You
should therefore make a careful note of the
number.
The key contains a unique electronic code
for your car. When the key is inserted in the
ignition, the code is checked. If it matches,
the car can be started.
Two keys are supplied with the car. It is pos-
sible to have up to four at one time that are
coded for your car. If one is lost, contact
your authorized Saab dealer to obtain a
replacement.
NOTE: For this reason, we strongly advise
you to take two keys with you on long jour-
neys and to keep them separate. If all keys
are lost, it will be necessary to replace costly
electronic components as well as the keys.
This loss and replacement cost is not cov-
ered by the new car warranty.
If an additional key is to be added, all of the
original keys must be brought to the dealer
so that the control module can ”learn” to rec-
ognize the new components.
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
Key / Remote control
1To lock
2 To unlock
3 Opening the trunk (9-5 Sedan)
Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 Wagon)
IB1524
3 2
1
43Security
To check the number of keys that are pro-
grammed for the car; see page 52.
Electronic starting interlock
(immobilizer)
Each time the key is removed from the igni-
tion, the electronic starting interlock is acti-
vated and the car is thus immobilized, see
also page 49.
Reprogramming lock system
functions
Certain lock system functions can be repro-
grammed by your authorized Saab dealer;
see page 271.
Locking/unlocking the car
When the car is locked and unlocked the
theft alarm is also affected.
Remote locking (1)
Press once on the control: all doors
locked.
The hazard warning lights will flash once
and the horn chirps once to confirm.
The tailgate cannot be opened now from
inside using the switch on the driver´s door.
Remote unlocking (2)
Press once on the control: the driver´s
door is unlocked. Press a second time to
unlock the rest of the doors.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice
and the horn chirps twice to confirm.
If remote unlocking should fail to work
Unlock the driver’s door with the key. To
silence the alarm, insert the key into the igni-
tion switch and turn it to the ON position.
The car can now be started. Contact your
local Saab dealer to have the system
checked and rectified.
NOTICE
The key contains delicate electronics.
• Do not expose it to water.
• Avoid rough handling.
• Do not place the key where it may be
subjected to high temperatures, e.g.
on the instrument panel.
• The key may malfunction if it becomes
very cold. Warm it in your hands for a
couple of minutes.
• Never open the key. For changing the
battery, see page 45.
IB1557
Locking/unlocking by remote control.
1To lock
2 To unlock
44 Security
Locking by key (1)
When the car is locked and unlocked the
theft alarm is also affected.
Turn the key clockwise: all doors locked.
The trunk lid/tailgate cannot be opened now
from inside using the switch on the driver’s
door.
Unlocking by key (2)
Turn the key counterclockwise once: the
driver´s door will unlock.
Turn the key counterclockwise twice: all
doors, but not trunk lid/tailgate, unlocked.
The central locking can also be operated
from inside the car by means of the
switch on the center console.
• To lock all doors: press the symbol side of
the switch once.
• To unlock the driver´s door: press the
switch once.
• To unlock all doors: press the switch
twice.
This switch is inoperative when the car is
locked from the outside using the remote
control.
The interior locking buttons on each door
affect only the respective door.
WARNING
The remote control also works from inside
the car. Therefore, hold the key in such a
way that the buttons are not unintention-
ally pressed when the key is turned, or
inserted or removed from the ignition
switch.
Otherwise, the doors may be unintention-
ally locked or the tailgate unlocked. On
Sedan models, the trunk may even be
opened.
IB451
Switch for operation of central locking
IB1555
2
1
Locking/unlocking by key
1 To lock
2 To unlock
45Security
If the car is left with the doors open, the inte-
rior lighting and the courtesy lights in the
doors will be switched off automatically after
20 minutes, to prevent a flat battery. In such
cases the electrically operated seats will not
function.
Child safety locks
The rear doors are equipped with child
safety locks that are operated by means of
a catch adjacent to the door lock.
Insert a key and turn the catch 45° clockwise
or counterclockwise as indicated by the
label on the door.
When the child safety catch is in the locked
position, the door cannot be opened from
the inside.
Changing the key battery
When the battery voltage in the key falls
below a predetermined level the Saab Infor-
mation Display (SID) will issue the following
message: ”REPLACE KEY BATTERY”.
Press the CLEAR button on the SID to
acknowledge this message. You must then
replace the battery without delay to avoid
malfunctions. The life of the battery is nor-
mally 4 years.Contact a Saab dealer to
have the battery replaced.
WARNING
Having the doors locked when you are
driving will reduce the likelihood of:
• Passengers, especially children,
opening doors and falling out of the
car.
• Intruders entering the car when it is
moving slowly or at a standstill.
• Injury resulting from a door bursting
open in the event of a crash.
However, you must also remember that
locked doors can hamper rescuers in the
event of a crash.
WARNING
If small children are carried in the rear
seat, the safety locks on rear doors
should be activated to prevent uninten-
tional opening from the inside.
IB1871
Child safety lock on rear doors
46 Security
Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan
The trunk lid lock is independent of the cen-
tral-locking system. The trunk lid release
switch on the driver’s door is inoperative
when the car is locked from the outside or
moving at a speed greater than 2.7 mph
(4 km/h).
Unlocking
The trunk lid is unlocked using:
• The button on the key
• The trunk lid switch on the inside of the
driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at
a standstill)
Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direc-
tion indicators flashing three times.
The trunk lid switch on the driver’s door is
inoperative when the car is locked.
Locking
The trunk lid release is locked automatically
when closed.
Trunk Release Handle
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from the inside.
NOTICE
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as a an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it.
IB1833
Trunk Release Handle
IB457
Trunk lid switch
47Security
Tailgate, 9-5 Wagon
The tailgate is not unlocked when the other
car doors are unlocked. The tailgate button
on the driver’s door is inoperative when the
car is locked or moving at a speed greater
than 2.7 mph (4 km/h).
Unlocking
The tailgate is unlocked using:
• The button on the key
• The tailgate switch on the inside of the
driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at
a standstill) or
• Manually, using the key in the trunk lock.
The keyhole is protected by a cover plate
that can be removed carefully as illus-
trated.
Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direc-
tion indicators flashing three times.
If the alarm is activated (the car is locked),
the alarm will sound if the trunk lid is
unlocked with a key. However, if the trunk lid
is opened using remote unlocking, the
alarm will not be triggered.
Locking
The tailgate is locked using:
• The button on the key
• The button on the centre console
• The key in the driver’s door.
• When vehicle speed exceeds 2 mph
(4 km/h).
IB1880 IB1879
Unlocking the tailgate with a key,
9-5 Wagon
Use the key to pry out the cover plate cov-
ering the lock, 9-5 Wagon
48 Security
Car alarm
The car alarm (anti-theft system) is acti-
vated/deactivated when the car is
locked/unlocked by the remote control or by
the key, see page 43.
The antenna for the alarm system is located
in the center console.
All the doors plus trunk lid/tailgate and hood
are monitored by microswitches, and win-
dow-glass sensors will trigger the alarm if
any glass is broken. Your Saab 9-5 is equipped with an Elec-
tronic starting interlock (immobilizer), see
page 49 for details.
The car alarm is armed 10 seconds after the
car has been locked by the remote control.
During this ten-second delay period, the
doors, trunk lid/tailgate and hood may still
be opened without the alarm being trig-
gered.
The LED indicator on the instrument panel
fascia will be on continuously during this
period, at the end of which it will start to flash
(once every other second).
If a door or the trunk lid/tailgate or hood has
been left open when the car is locked, the
LED on the fascia will flash (three times per
second) for ten seconds to indicate this.
Check to ensure that all the doors, plus
trunk lid/tailgate and hood, are closed prop-
erly.
If the fault persists (LED flashing when
renewed attempt made to activate the car
alarm by remote control), lock the car using
the key instead. The car alarm will not have
been activated and you should get in touch
with an authorized Saab dealer.
To avoid inconvenience caused by the
alarm being triggered inadvertently, make
sure that anyone else using the car is famil-
iar with how both the car alarm and the lock-
ing system work.
If the alarm is tripped (the direction indica-
tors are flashing and the siren is on) it can
be turned off by unlocking the car using the
button.
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
IB1524
3 2
1
Remote control
1 Activate/lock
2 Deactivate/unlock
3 Unlock trunk/tailgate
Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 Wagon)
49Security
Activating the car alarm
The car alarm cannot be activated if the
driver’s door is open or if the ignition switch
is in ON position.
If, on the other hand, one of the other doors
or the trunk or hood is open or opened and
not closed again during the 10-seconds
delay period, it will be excluded from the
alarm function.
If it is then closed, a new delay period of ten
seconds will start, and the door (or trunk or
hood) will once again be secured by the
alarm system.
As usual, the LED will be on continuously
during the new delay period and will start to
flash once every other second after the
10-seconds period has elapsed.
Window glass sensor
The car-alarm system incorporates a
sensor that monitors the window glass for
the sound of breakage. The sensor is fitted
inside the rear dome light.
To avoid false alarms, such as the alarm
being triggered by noise from passers by
when the windows have been left open, or
when children or pets are left inside the car,
the sensor can be temporarily disabled.
To disable the sensor
To disable the sensor, first turn off the igni-
tion and remove the key from the switch.
Next, press and hold the NIGHT PANEL
button until ”DOOR ALARM ONLY” appears
on the Saab Information Display (SID) and
a chime sounds. The car alarm must now be
activated within three minutes, or the glass
sensor will become active again.
The glass sensor will be enabled again
automatically when the car is next unlocked.
The sensor can also be enabled again by
repeating the procedure for disabling it.
When the sensor has been enabled, ”FULL
THEFT ALARM” will appear on the Saab
Information Display (SID).
If a fault is detected in the glass sensor,
”SERVICE THEFT ALARM” will appear on
the Saab Information Display (SID).
Electronic starting interlock
(immobilizer)
When the key is inserted in the ignition, a
signal is sent to the receiver. If the signal is
verified, the engine can be started.
Each time the key is removed from the igni-
tion, the electronic immobilizer is activated.
This means that the car cannot be started
without the correct key inserted in the igni-
tion and the immobilizer thus deactivated.
If a fault is detected (e.g. in the transmitter)
”KEY NOT ACCEPTED” will appear on the
Saab Information Display (SID).
In this case, you can still start the car if you
turn the ignition key to ON and press one of
the buttons on the key (providing that the
receiver gets the right signal from the key).
Take the car to an authorized Saab dealer to
have the system checked.
The LED double-flashes when the car is
immobilized.
50 Security
Alarm signals
When the car alarm is armed, it will be trig-
gered if any door, or the trunk lid or hood, is
opened or if a window is broken.
The alarm will also be triggered if an attempt
is made to bypass or short-circuit the igni-
tion switch, or to disconnect the battery.
If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
signals will be set off:
• Flashing of hazard warning lights for five
minutes.
• Siren wailing for 30 seconds.
The alarm signals will stop if the alarm is
deactivated (car unlocked) during the alarm
period.
The alarm siren has a long-life battery
(approx. 10 years), see ”SERVICE THEFT
ALARM”, on page 52. When the battery
goes dead, the siren must be replaced: it is
not possible to change the batteries.
Panic-function
In the car alarm system is a function called
"Panic-function".
To activate panic function:
• Push and hold one of the buttons on the
key for 2 seconds. Or, if you are sitting
inside the car, push the LOCK-switch on
the center console for 2 seconds.
These actions will trigger the alarm (hazard
warning lights and siren).
To deactivate panic function:
• Push one of the buttons on the key, push
the LOCK-switch in the center console,
turn the key in the driver´s door or turn the
ignition to ON.
When the panic-function is activated the car
will be locked/unlocked depending upon
which button was pushed.
When the ignition is ON the panic-function
cannot be activated.
NOTICE
• It is possible to inadvertently deacti-
vate the car alarm and at the same
time unlock the car, if the button on the
key is pressed by mistake when the
car is still within its range.
• When locking the car by remote con-
trol in extremely cold weather, it is
advisable to check that the lock
system has operated properly. To do
so, check that the interior locking but-
tons are all down.
If not, unlock and relock the car again.
51Security
Overview of functions
Alarm signals may differ between model variants for different coun-
tries.
Some of the car-alarm functions can be reprogrammed – con-
sult your Saab dealer for further details (see page 271).
Locking/
activation Hazard warning lights flash once and the horn
chirps once.
The LED will come on for 10 seconds.
Unlocking/
deactivation Hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn
chirps twice.
The LED will come on for two seconds.
Unlocking/
deactivation of
trunk lid/tailgate
alarm
Hazard warning lights flash three times and the
horn chirps three times.
The LED will flash three times per second for 10
seconds.
Alarm triggered Hazard warning lights flash for 5 min.
Siren wails for 30 seconds.
To switch off the alarm, deactivate the system in
the normal way (unlocking).
Window-glass
sensor The sensor detects if any window is broken and
triggers the alarm.
To disable the sensor, see page 49.
Key The range of the key is normally 5–10 yds. (5–
10 metres), although it can be substantially more
than this in ideal conditions (range can vary
greatly depending on the position of the car and
its surroundings).
If the key is not working, it may be because the
code signal has not been synchronized with that
in the control module for the car alarm. To rectify
this, press the unlock button on the key at least
four times in quick succession. When it is recog-
nized, the door locks will cycle.
If a key is lost, the new one will have to be pro-
grammed (all keys must be present) to match the
car’s unique security code. Contact an author-
ized Saab dealer.
Battery for key The battery for the key will normally have a life of
4 years. When the battery needs changing,
”REPLACE KEY BATTERY” will appear on the
Saab Information Display (SID).
Contact an authorized Saab dealer.
Car-battery
voltage If the battery is disconnected while the alarm is
active (car is locked), for example during an
attempt to steal the car, the alarm will be trig-
gered.
52 Security
Overview of LED signals and SID messages
Some signals may differ between model variants for different
countries.
Status LED signal
Activation (during 10-second delay). Comes on for 10 seconds.
Alarm activated (after delay). Flashes once every other
second.
Deactivation. Comes on for 2 seconds.
Alarm not activated. Off.
Door, trunk lid/tailgate or hood open
or opened during delay period. Flashes three times per sec-
ond for 10 seconds.
Unlocking the trunk lid/tailgate. Flashes three times per sec-
ond for 10 seconds.
Closing of door, trunk lid/tailgate or
hood after delay period. Comes on for 10 seconds.
Car immobilized but not locked.
Car alarm not activated. Flashes twice at three sec-
onds intervals.
Fault in a switch serving doors, hood
or trunk lid. Flashing (instead of being
on continuously) during
delay period.
SID message Reason/action
SERVICE THEFT ALARM Probably a fault in one of the sensors
or the alarm siren.
Have the car checked by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
KEY NOT ACCEPTED Fault in key transmitter or in igni-
tion-switch receiver.
Turn ignition switch to ON and press
the unlock button on the key. Start
the engine.
Have the car checked by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
REPLACE KEY BATTERY Fit a new battery in the key, see page
45.
DOOR ALARM ONLY Window-glass sensor disabled.
FULL THEFT ALARM Window-glass sensor in circuit.
• REMOTE KEY
• TRANSPONDR Turn the ignition key to position ON
and then press the button for open-
ing the trunk lid. Saab Information
Display (SID) displays the number of
keys and transmitters (transpon-
ders) coded to the car.
53Security
Canada only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired oper-
ation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manu-
facturer could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
54 Security
(This page has been left blank)
55Instruments and controls
Instruments and
controls
Indicator and warning
lights ................................. 56
Instruments ........................ 62
Saab Information Display
(SID)................................... 65
Switches ............................. 71
Automatic climate control
(ACC)................................. 77
ECON OFF …F
…C
ECON OFF
CLEAR SET
IB1
939
VOL
TRE
BALON
FADBAS
PULLPUSH
AS
SEARCH
213
546
DOLBY B NR
56 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning
lights
A number of indicator and warning lights will
come on when the ignition is switched on
prior to starting. Under normal conditions,
these should go out a few seconds after the
engine has started (see page 62).
Warning, oil pressure
(engine oil)
This light will come on together with if
the engine oil pressure is dangerously low.
If the light flashes or comes on while you are
driving, stop the car, switch off the engine
and check the engine oil level (see page
203).
NOTICE
Under no circumstances must the car be
driven when this warning light is on. Low
oil pressure can result in serious engine
damage.
Main instrument panel
1 Tachometer
2 Indicator and warning lights
3 Speedometer
4 Indicator and warning lights
5 Pressure gauge
6 Fuel gauge
7 Engine temperature gauge
8 Trip meter reset button
9 Odometer and trip meter
57Instruments and controls
Warning, charging
This light will come on together with if
the battery is discharging. If it comes on
while you are driving, stop the car as soon
as possible and switch off the engine.
Check the alternator drive belt (see page
211). If the belt has broken, the engine may
overheat (cooling system will not function
properly), the battery will not be charged,
the A/C compressor will not run and power
assistance for the steering will be lost.
Brake warning light
This light will come on together with if
there is insufficient brake fluid in the reser-
voir (see pages 207).
If the ABS warning light is on at the same
time, the ABS system may be inoperative
because of a fault (see ”Anti-lock brake
warning”, page 58).
Parking brake warning
light
This light will show when the parking brake
is on (see page 195).
If the car is driven with the parking brake still
on, will also come on and a chime will
sound.
The parking brake is mechanical and oper-
ates on the rear wheels.
WARNING
Never drive the car when these warning
lights are on. Danger of brake failure!
Have the brake system checked at once
by an authorized Saab dealer.
WARNING
•Always apply the parking brake when
parking, see page 195.
•Always apply the parking brake
before removing the ignition key.
•Do not apply the parking brake while
the car is moving.
58 Instruments and controls
Anti-lock brake warning
This light will come on if a fault has occurred
in the ABS system.
On certain variants and as well
as can light up to indicate a fault in the
electronic brake force distribution system
(distribution of the brake pressure between
the front and rear wheels).
Conventional braking without the ABS func-
tion will still be available.
For safety reasons, stop the car and check
the level of the brake fluid (see page 207).
If the level is normal, depress the brake
pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
the level again. If the level is still normal, you
may drive the car, with considerable cau-
tion, to the nearest authorized Saab dealer
to have the brake system checked.
Airbag warning light
This light together with will come on if
a potentially serious fault has occurred in
the airbag system.
The light will come on for about three sec-
onds when the ignition switch is turned to
the Start or Drive position. It should go out
after the engine has started.
WARNING
• If the ABS is inoperative, there is a
danger of the rear wheels locking up
on hard braking.
• If the level of brake fluid in the reser-
voir is below the MIN mark, the car
should be towed to an authorized
Saab dealer.
WARNING
• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. One or more of the following
conditions may occur:
- Non-deployment of the airbags in the
event of a crash.
- Deployment of the airbags without a
crash.
- Deployment of the airbags in
crashes less severe than intended.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
59Instruments and controls
CHECK message indicator
This light indicates that there is a message
in the Saab Information Display (SID). A
chime will also sound
(see page 69).
Central warning light
This light will come on and a chime will
sound if a fault has been detected in any
system that is critical to safety. Any of the
following can activate the central warning
light and alarm:
• Airbag system.
• Low oil pressure in engine.
• Parking brake is on (when car is moving).
• Brake fluid level low.
• Fault detected in ABS system.
• Electronic brake force distribution (distri-
bution of brake pressure between front
and rear wheels).
• Engine overheating.
• Alternator not charging properly.
Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)
This light indicates a malfunction in the
fuel-injection or ignition system. The car
may still be driven with care and with some-
what diminished performance (see page
155).
Indicator, fuel
This light comes on when there is less than
about 2.5 gallons (10 liters) of fuel left in the
tank.
WARNING
An illuminated ”Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indi-
cates an engine-related problem. While
your car may be able to be driven with the
”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
indicator light illuminated (Limp-home
mode), you are advised to have your car
serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as
soon as possible.
Continued driving without this problem
being corrected might cause serious
further damage to your car and create
unsafe driving conditions. The operator
should be prepared to take action if such
unsafe conditions arise (e.g.brake
smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suita-
ble place, switch off the engine, etc.).
NOTICE
The car should be checked immediately
at an authorized Saab dealer to prevent
more serious faults from arising.
NOTICE
If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
the catalytic converter to be damaged by
overheating.
60 Instruments and controls
Indicator, cruise control
This light shows when the cruise-control
system is active (see page 171).
Indicator, high beam
This light shows when the headlights are on
high beam (see page 71).
Indicator, rear fog light
This light shows when the rear fog light is on
(see page 72).
The rear fog light is switched off automat-
ically when the engine is switched off. When
the fog light is next needed, it will have to be
switched on manually again.
The rear fog light consists of one light so it
should not be mistaken for brake lights.
Bi-Xenon headlight fault
indicator
(certain variants only)
This light indicates that there is a fault in the
Bi-Xenon headlight system, which consists
of xenon headlights and an automatic level-
ling system.
If a fault arises in the Bi-Xenon headlight
system, the headlights will be angled down
to avoid dazzling drivers in oncoming traffic.
Adjust your speed accordingly as visibility
will be reduced.
Indicator, open door
If a door has not been closed properly, the
pictogram will indicate the door concerned
(or tailgate).
Indicator, SPORT-mode
automatic transmission
This light will come on in cars with automatic
transmission when the S (SPORT) button
on the selector lever has been pressed
(position N or D) see page 170.
In this mode, the gear changes occur later,
at higher engine revs, giving the engine and
transmission a sportier feel.
To cancel the SPORT mode, press the S
button on the selector lever again. The
mode is also deselected automatically
when the selector lever is moved to P, R, M
or L.
Indicator, WINTER-mode
automatic transmission
This light shows when the WINTER mode
has been selected in cars with automatic
transmission (see page 170).
In the WINTER mode, the car pulls away in
3rd gear, to help prevent wheelspin on an
icy road.
To cancel the WINTER mode, press the W
button.
NOTICE
If the Bi-Xenon headlight fault indicator
lights up, have your car checked as soon
as possible at an authorized Saab dealer.
If you do not rectify the problem, nighttime
visibility will be poor since the range of the
headlights is reduced.
61Instruments and controls
Automatic transmission,
fault indicator
On a car with an automatic transmission,
this warning symbol is illuminated if a fault
has been detected in the transmission.
Switch the ignition off and on again to check
if the fault persists.
Even if the fault persists, it is still possible in
most cases to drive the car (see page 165).
Have the automatic transmission checked
by an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
possible.
Indicator TCS/ESP OFF
(option, certain models
only)
The indicator light goes on when the Elec-
tronic Stability Program/Traction Control
System is switched off with the TCS/ESP-
button.
IMPORTANT: the system is automatically
engaged every time the engine is started
(see page 175).
The indicator light also goes on when there
is a fault in the system. In this case the light
cannot be turned off by means of the
TCS/ESP button. If a fault is indicated, have
the system checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
See also ”Traction Control System (TCS)”,
on page 175 and “Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP) on page 176.
Indicator TCS/ESP
(option, certain models
only)
The TCS/ESP indicator light is located in the
tachometer and will be illuminated when
TCS/ESP regulation is occurring, i.e. when
there is insufficient traction between the
tires and the road surface to provide the grip
required for the acceleration called for. The
driver can also sense that the engine is not
responding normally to the accelerator.
Operation of the TCS/ESP indicates
reduced traction between the tires and the
road, and that extra care should be taken by
the driver.
In normal driving, the TCS/ESP will help to
improve both ride comfort and safety, but
must not be regarded as a system to enable
the driver to drive at or maintain a higher
rate of speed. The same precautions for
safe cornering and driving on slippery roads
must still be applied (see page 175).
NOTICE
If the control module has actuated the
Limp-home function for the automatic
transmission, the car will remain in 5th
gear when D is selected, making it very
sluggish. To overcome this, select posi-
tion L to prevent unnecessary wear on the
transmission. The transmission then
starts in 2nd gear. When the car is moving
you can select position D.
When the indicator light is on, the car
must not be driven with a trailer attached.
62 Instruments and controls
Autochecking of lights,
main instrument panel
The above warning and indicator lights
should come on when the ignition is
switched on prior to starting. They should go
out after about 3 seconds.
The following lights light up until the engine
is started, presuming that no fault exists:
• Central warning light .
• Oil pressure warning light .
• Warning, charging .
Instruments
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute. The
needle may be allowed to enter the broken
red zone on the dial only for an instant.
A safety cut-out function (in the fuel system)
prevents the engine speed from exceeding
approximately 6,200 rpm.
Odometer and trip meter
The odometer records the distance traveled
in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Canadian
vehicles the distance indicated is in kilome-
tres, and the trip meter in miles and tenths
(kilometres and tenths of kilometres on
Canadian vehicles).
Reset button
The reset button has two functions, deter-
mined by whether the ignition is ON or OFF.
• When the ignition is ON, pressing the
button will reset the trip meter.
• When the ignition is OFF, the display
lights up for 20 seconds enabling you to
read the odometer and trip meter. Press-
ing the button a second time within these
20 seconds will reset the trip meter.
IB1922
IB340
IB341
1 Cars with automatic transmission
63Instruments and controls
Speedometer
(U.S. speedometer shown)
The speedometer receives signals from the
wheel sensors in the ABS system.
If the NIGHT PANEL mode has been
selected, the scale will be illuminated up to
87 mph (140 km/h). The remainder of the
scale will be illuminated if the speed of the
car exceeds 84 mph (135 km/h).
Fuel gauge
Fuel-tank capacity, 18.5 US gal. (70 liters).
The fuel gauge shows the amount of fuel left
in the tank. When this is down to about
2.5 gal. (10 liters), a warning light on the
main instrument panel will come on (see
page 59).
Use the Saab Information display (SID) to
check the approximate distance that can be
traveled on the remaining fuel
(see page 65).
Temperature gauge
The temperature gauge shows the temper-
ature of the coolant. The needle should be
in the middle of the scale when the engine
is at normal operating temperature.
If the needle approaches the red zone,
which can occur in very hot weather or when
the engine is under a heavy load, drive in the
highest gear possible, keep the engine revs
low and avoid shifting down.
If the needle enters the red zone, the
warning light will come on and an alarm
chime will sound.
20
30
40 50 60 70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
240
260 220 200
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
10
IB1851
IB345
IB343
64 Instruments and controls
Check fuse 1 (radiator fan) in the fuse panel
under the hood, see page 230.
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone,
stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so and
check the coolant level by looking at the
level visible through the plastic tank – do not
remove the cap.
If the coolant level falls below the MIN mark,
the Saab Information Display (SID) will dis-
play the message ”FILL COOLANT FLUID”.
Pressure gauge
The turbo gauge indicates the air volume for
combustion, which is equivalent to the
engine load.
At low loads, the needle will move within the
white zone. At higher loads and during
heavy acceleration, the needle will enter the
yellow area. At very high loads or under cer-
tain barometric conditions, the needle may
enter the first part of the red zone without
indicating that there is a fault.
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone
and the engine at the same time loses
power, because the monitoring system is
holding the charging pressure down, you
should contact an authorized Saab dealer.
If the speed exceeds 149 mph/240 km/h
(155 mph/250 km/h, 9-5 Aero) the increase
in speed will be limited by the lowering of the
boost pressure. The pressure gauge then
moves towards the middle of the orange
zone, indicating reduced engine output and
thus reduces the speed of the car as well.
NOTICE
If the needle, despite the above action,
enters the red zone, stop the car immedi-
ately, let the engine idle.
If the needle stays in the red zone, stop
the engine.
WARNING
Never open the cap of the expansion tank
completely when the engine is hot, open
with care. The pressure in the cool-
ing-system can cause hot coolant and
steam to be released. Failure to heed this
warning may result in personal injury.
IB344
65Instruments and controls
Selector lever indication
(Automatic transmission)
The position of the selector lever is indi-
cated on the main instrument panel. If
manual mode is selected, the current gear
is also displayed.
Saab Information
Display (SID)
The Saab Information Display (SID) shows
CHECK messages and incorporates eight
trip-computer functions.
The SID is also used by the Audio System.
Trip computer
Selecting the function
Use the button to scroll through the
following functions:
Use the button to scroll through the
following functions:
WARNING
It is strongly recommended that the SID
settings be changed only when the car is
stationary. The driver’s attention can
otherwise easily be distracted from the
road. DIST Distance to destination / Trip
meter.
ARRIV Estimated time of arrival.
ALARM Alarm function.
SPD W Speed warning (chime).
TEMP Outdoor temperature and Date.
D.T.E. Estimated range (distance to
empty fuel tank).
FUEL ∅ Average fuel consumption
since function last reset.
SPD ∅ Average speed since function
last reset.
NIGHT PANEL
CLEAR SET
IB346
66 Instruments and controls
Outdoor temperature
(Frost warning)
Regardless of which function has been
selected, except Night Panel Mode, SID will
automatically display the outdoor tempera-
ture when it is between 26° and 38°F (–3°
and +3°C). This also applies if the
temperature has moved outside the range
of 21° to 43°F (–6° to +6°C) but is again
between 26° and 38°F (–3° and +3°C).
Entering values for the functions
Values can be entered for the following
functions: SPD ∅, DIST, ARRIV, ALARM
and SPD W.
1 Select the desired function using or
.
2 Press the SET button for at least one
second (figures start to flash and a
chime sounds).
3 Use or to increase or decrease
the value (press CLEAR to reset).
4 Press SET to record the value.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated
using the values for fuel consumed and dis-
tance driven since last reset. This value is
stored in the car’s trip computer even when
the engine is switched off.
•Select FUEL Ø with .
To reset the value, press the CLEAR button
for 4 seconds. A chime will be heard and
CLEARED will be displayed.
Setting the date
1 Use to select TEMP.
2 Press the SET button for at least one
second (year starts to flash and a chime
sounds).
3 Set the year using or .
4 Touch SET.
5 Set the month in the same way.
6 Touch SET.
7 Set the day in the same way.
8 Press SET to save the date setting.
WARNING
Remember that roads can be icy even at
temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),
especially on bridges and stretches of
road that are sheltered from the sun.
67Instruments and controls
Turning the Alarm and Speed
warning on or off
1 Select the Alarm or Speed-warning
function.
2 Press SET to turn on the function.
Press CLEAR to turn off the function.
When either function is on, ALARM/SPD W
respectively will be visible on the display. An
asterisk * will be visible on the far right of the
display when either function is selected.
The Alarm and Speed-warning settings will
not be cancelled when the engine is
switched off.
When the Alarm has been set to come on at
a specified time, it will only be activated
once – it will not come on at the same time
every day. Press SET to turn it on again.
The Alarm will continue to beep for one
minute if not switched off.
Calculation of arrival time and
average speed
The settings must be made before the jour-
ney is started.
Calculation of arrival time:
1 Select DIST using the button.
2 Set the destination distance.
3 Press SET.
When ARRIV is selected during the journey,
the arrival time based on the average speed
over the past 20 minutes will be displayed.
The trip computer will include any stops in
the calculation of the estimated time of
arrival.
Press DIST and the distance remaining to
the destination will be displayed in the same
way.
After the distance to destination has
decreased to zero, the DIST will function as
a trip meter (see ”Using DIST as a trip
meter”). The starting value for the trip meter
will be the last distance set in the DIST
function.
Example: The DIST setting was 100 miles.
Once 100 miles (160 km) has been cov-
ered, the DIST will start to function as a trip
meter, the initial reading of which will be
100 miles (160 km).
Using DIST as a trip meter
If no value has been set for the DIST func-
tion, DIST will now function as a trip meter
(indicated by an arrow on the far right of the
display).
Press CLEAR to reset the trip meter.
Under 1000 miles the distance will be
shown in increments of 0.1 miles,
there-after, the reading will change in incre-
ments of 1.0 mile.
Metric units: for just under a kilometer, the
distance will be shown in increments of
10 meters, there-after, the reading will
change in increments of 100 meters.
When DIST is functioning as a trip meter,
the ARRIV function will display the current
time.
68 Instruments and controls
To calculate the arrival time if a specified
average speed is maintained
1 Select DIST using the button.
2 Set the distance to be covered.
3 Press to select SPD Ø.
4 Set the average speed you intend to
drive.
5 Press SET to display the estimated
arrival time.
At the beginning of a journey, the SPD Ø
and ARRIV functions will display current
values. If values are set during the journey,
the new values will be displayed after a
delay of about 10 seconds.
Calculating the requisite average speed:
1 Press to select DIST.
2 Set the distance to be covered.
3 Press to select ARRIV.
4 Set the desired arrival time.
5 Press SET to display the average speed
you need to maintain to arrive at the
desired time.
At the beginning of a journey, the SPD Ø
and ARRIV functions will display current
values. If values are set during the journey,
the new values will be displayed after a
delay of about 10 seconds.
Resetting values
To reset the values, press CLEAR for at
least four seconds.
The following functions will be reset
simultaneously:
• Estimated range on remaining fuel
(function based on a fuel consumption of
28 mpg).
• Average fuel consumption.
• Average speed.
• Arrival time (function based on current
speed).
Programmed values for DIST, ALARM and
SPD W will not be reset (see the respective
function).
69Instruments and controls
CHECK messages
When the engine is started, CHECKING will
appear on the display for about four sec-
onds, while the SID checks are being per-
formed.
When a CHECK message is generated
while the car is being driven, a chime will
sound, INFO DISPL will illuminate on the
main instrument panel, and the message
will appear on the SID. The number of mes-
sages that can be displayed by the SID
varies with the specification of the car.
If more than one CHECK message has
been generated, the + symbol will appear to
the left of the text on the display. The mes-
sages appear in order of priority.
If a new fault occurs while another message
is being displayed, the message relating to
the new one will appear for 10 seconds,
after which the display will return to the ear-
lier one.
Press CLEAR once to acknowledge a mes-
sage, whereupon it will be cleared from the
display. It will not be displayed again before
the ignition has been switched off and then
on again.
The following messages may be displayed:
1 This message will be displayed approxi-
mately 600 miles (1,000 km) before the next
scheduled service is due, or when 365 days
have elapsed since the last service. The
message should be cleared at the time of that
service (see the Saab Warranties & Service
Record Booklet).
This message can also be deleted by first
briefly pressing the CLEAR button, then
depressing it a second time for at least eight
seconds until ”SERVICE” appears on the dis-
play and a chime sounds. The message can
only be deleted when it is shown on the SID.
Night panel
To improve night-driving conditions inside
the car, the Night Panel mode can be
selected. In this mode, the amount of infor-
mation displayed is reduced, and only the
most important instruments and displays
will be illuminated.
When the Night Panel button is pressed,
only the speedometer will be illuminated (up
to the 87-mph or 140-km/h graduation), all
the other instruments illumination being
extinguished and their needles moved to
zero. Both the SID and the ACC displays will
be extinguished and the backlighting for
switches and other controls will be dimmed.
Note: All indicator and warning lights,
together with the display of CHECK mes-
sages, will operate as normal, except ”Out-
door temperature (Frost warning)”, see
page 66.
Message See
page
FRONT LIGHT FAILURE 215
REAR LIGHT FAILURE 219
FOG LIGHT FAILURE 219
BRAKE LIGHT FAILURE 219
WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW 213
FILL COOLANT FLUID 206
REPLACE KEY BATTERY 45
KEY NOT ACCEPTED 52
SERVICE THEFT ALARM 52
TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING 166
TIGHTEN FUEL FILLER CAP 158
TIME FOR SERVICE 1) 254
70 Instruments and controls
The following conditions will wake up the
respective displays in the Night-Panel
mode:
• Setting of the Audio system, SID or ACC
(display comes on for ten seconds).
• CHECK message generated in the SID.
• High engine revs cause the rev counter to
be illuminated until the engine speed has
fallen again.
• If the quantity of fuel remaining falls below
4 gallons (15 liters), the fuel gauge will be
illuminated.
• If the engine temperature rises above nor-
mal, the temperature gauge will be illumi-
nated.
• If the speed of the car exceeds 84 mph
(135 km/h), the entire speedometer will
be illuminated.
• In cars with automatic transmission, if the
selector lever is moved from D to position
M or L, the selector indication on the main
instrument panel will be illuminated.
To restore the displays and lighting to the
normal mode, press the Night-Panel button.
Units and language versions
The SID has four sets of units:
CHECK messages can be displayed in six
language options: English, Swedish,
German, French, Italian and Spanish.
Selecting units and language
1 Press CLEAR and SET simultaneously
for four seconds until a chime sounds.
2 Press or to select the required
units.
3 Touch SET.
4 Press or to select the required
language.
5 Touch SET.
Clock
Set the clock by means of the two buttons
under the digital clock on the left of the dis-
play.
When the ignition key is in the OFF position
or removed, the clock can be illuminated
(approx. 10 seconds) by pressing one of
the SID buttons (not the NIGHT PANEL but-
ton).
METRIC IMP. 1 IMP. 2 US
km miles miles miles
km/h mph mph mph
liters UK gal UK gal US gal
°C °F °C °F
24-hour 12-hour 12-hour 12-hour
71Instruments and controls
Switches
Daytime running lights
The parking lights and daytime running
lights come on automatically when the igni-
tion switch is ON.
Note to owners in the U.S.: If you do not
want Daytime Running Lights, this feature
can be disconnected: switch off the engine
and remove fuse No. 35 (see page 228).
Note to owners in Canada: Daytime Run-
ning Lights must not be disconnected as
they are a Canadian Federal legal require-
ment.
Parking lights
The parking lights can be switched on
regardless of the position of the ignition
switch. Do not use parking lights when driv-
ing.
Note: The lighting switch must be in parking
light or headlight position (low beam posi-
tion only) to operate the fog lights (see page
74).
Headlights
The headlights come on automatically when
the ignition is ON and go off when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the LOCK position.
The parking lights, however, can be on
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-
tion.
High/low beam
To switch between high and low beam, pull
the control stalk fully towards you
(position 2). When the high beam is on, the
indicator on the main instrument panel will
be illuminated.
High beam flasher
The headlights come on to high beam when
the stalk is pulled to the first spring-loaded
position (position 1) and remain on until the
stalk is released.
Note:
On cars equipped with Bi-Xenon lamps, the
Halogen lamps are used only for high beam
flasher if the daytime running lights have
been de-activated and the headlight switch
is in the off position (US only).
IB1594
12
1 High beam signal
2 High/low beam switching
IB350
Light switches
72 Instruments and controls
Courtesy Headlight Feature
A delay function allows the headlights to
remain on low beam for about 30 seconds
after the driver’s door has been closed.
To activate this function,
• Switch off the ignition and remove the key
• Open the driver’s door
• Pull the high/low beam control stalk
towards the steering wheel like you are
flashing the high beam, see page 71. The
low beam headlights will now come on
immediately after the driver’s door has
been closed (within 30 seconds) and will
remain on for about 30 seconds.
The length of time for this function can be
adjusted by your authorized Saab dealer. Rear fog light
Press the button to switch on the rear fog
light, which will only come on if the head-
lights are on.
The rear fog light will go off automatically
when the engine is switched off. When the
fog light is next needed, it will have to be
switched on manually again.
The rear fog light consists of one light so it
should not be mistaken for brake lights.
Make sure you are familiar with the appli-
cable provincial/state law regarding the
use of rear fog lights.
WARNING
In poor visibility, avoid following the tail
lights of the vehicle in front. If the vehicle
stops suddenly, you may be unable to
avoid a crash and therefore risk injury to
yourself and others.
IB351
Rear fog light
73Instruments and controls
Instrument illumination
The brightness of the instrument illumina-
tion can be varied by means of the dimmer
switch adjacent to the headlight switch.
(See also Night panel on page 69).
In daylight or other equally bright light, the
instrument and switch illumination is auto-
matically extinguished.
Turn signal and lane change indica-
tors
To switch on the turn signals/lane change
indicators, move the stalk up or down.
The stalk has fixed positions for indicating a
right or left turn, and the indicators are can-
celled automatically (stalk returns to off
position).
The stalk also has an intermediate,
spring-loaded position that is useful for sig-
nalling when changing lanes or passing.
The respective indicator lights on the instru-
ment panel flash at the same frequency as
the direction indicators.
IB352
1
0
2
IB1595
Turn signal and lane change indicators
1 Right indicators
2 Left indicators
Instrument illumination
74 Instruments and controls
Front fog lights
The front fog lights can be activated in both
low beam headlight and parking light posi-
tions. Fog lights should only be used in poor
visibility conditions.
Make sure you are familiar with the appli-
cable provincial/state law regarding the
use of fog lights.
Reversing lights
The reversing lights come on automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or selected
with the ignition switched on.
Hazard warning lights
When this button is pressed, all the turn
signal indicators and a symbol in the button
flash simultaneously. If the ignition is on,
both indicator lights on the instrument panel
will also flash.
If the hazard warning lights are left on for
some time, the flasher frequency will be
reduced to save the battery.
Hazard warning lights should only be used
if the car constitutes a hazard to other road
users.
WARNING
Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
has to be left at the roadside on account
of a crash, engine trouble or a puncture. If
you carry a warning triangle or flares, they
should be set up along the side of the road
300 ft. (100 m) behind your vehicle. If the
car is not clearly visible (e.g. over the
brow of a hill or bridge), place the trian-
gle/flare even further back.
IB355
IB356
Hazard warning lights
75Instruments and controls
Wipers and washers
There are three intermittent wiper positions.
Moving the control stalk to the
spring-loaded position between 0 and 2 will
produce a single sweep of the wipers.
The wipers are designed for optimal clean-
ing at all driving speeds. At higher speeds,
it may be possible to detect a slight ”sweep-
ing” sound. This may be due to the
increased air pressure on the blades at
higher speeds.
Headlight washers
If low beam is on, the headlights are washed
every fifth time the windshield washers are
used or if 2 minutes have elapsed since the
windshield was last washed. The headlight
washers cannot be activated separately.
The headlight washers are of the high-pres-
sure type, which means that other parts of
the car may become wet if you activate the
washers while the car is stationary.
Rain sensing wipers (option)
The rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers. The sensor is located on
the windshield beside the rearview mirror.
The system varies between single sweeps
of the windshield and continuous wiping
depending on how much water or snow
there is on the windshield.
Activate the system by lifting the control
stalk to position 1. The wipers make one
sweep for reference to see how much water
and snow is on the windshield. In future, the
sensor compares the amount of water and
snow on the windshield with this reference
value.
When the engine has been switched off,
the control stalk must be moved to posi-
tion 0 and back to position 1 to reactivate
the sensor.
Set the sensitivity using the control on the
wiper stalk (the same control as used for
wiper delay on cars not fitted with a rain sen-
sor). The sensor has three sensitivity set-
tings. It is most sensitive when in the upper-
WARNING
Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is
ON when clearing snow and ice from the
windshield, to avoid personal injury.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the windshield
wipers, turn the rain sensor off before
washing the car in an automatic carwash.
IB359
0
4
1
2
3
0 OFF
1 Intermittent operation
2 Low speed
3 High speed
4 Washers
1
2
IB569
Control for setting wiper delay
1 Long delay
2 Short delay
76 Instruments and controls
most position (1). When a higher degree of
sensitivity is selected, the wipers make one
sweep of the windshield for reference.
The rain sensor has a daylight and a night
time mode. The sensor measures the
amount of available light and automatically
selects the appropriate mode. The sensor is
more sensitive at night. The function of the
rain sensor is impaired by dry snow.
Rear-window wiper (9-5 Wagon)
The rear-window wiper and washer are
operated with the same stalk switch as used
for washing and wiping the windshield and
headlights.
This stalk has two additional switches,
ON/OFF and .
The ON position provides intermittent wip-
ing.
The position provides washing and
wiping. After a few sweeps the wiper stops
or reverts to intermittent wiping, if this has
been chosen. About 15 seconds after com-
pletion of the washing/wiping of the rear
window, the wiper makes a single sweep to
wipe away any remaining washer fluid.
A spring-loaded position between the OFF
and ON positions allows for a single sweep
of the rear-window wiper.
Intermittent wiping of the rear window
occurs when reverse gear is engaged if the
windshield wipers are in position 1, 2 or 3,
see page 75.
For how to adjust the rear window washer
jet on the 9-5 Wagon, refer to page 212.
2
1
IB1207
Rear-window wiper
1 Intermittent wiping
2 Washers
77Instruments and controls
Automatic climate
control (ACC)
The ACC system automatically works to
maintain the desired temperature inside the
car.
The system will achieve the desired temper-
ature in the quickest possible way. Note that
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
that desired will not speed up the process.
For the ACC system to be most effective, all
windows (and sunroof, if fitted) should be
closed.
Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an
inlet grille adjacent to the bottom edge of the
windshield. The air flows through a filter
upstream of the ACC system before deliv-
ery to the cabin. Cabin air is evacuated via
openings in the rear parcel shelf and then
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled and, finally, if required,
heated.
The filter is a combined particle and char-
coal filter. It is so efficient that levels of nox-
ious substances such as benzene and tolu-
ene are also reduced.
To reduce the likelihood of misting on the
insides of the windows, the glass should be
cleaned with a quality window cleaner. How
often this will need to be done depends on
how clean the air is – if there are smokers in
the car, cleaning will need to be done more
frequently.
AUTO
ECON OFF
AUTO
ºF
ºC ºF
ºC
ECON OFF
IB367
91
5
4
2
36
87
ACC panel
1 Temperature setting: LH side
2 AUTO: All settings selected automatically
3 Manual setting of fan speed
4 Manual setting of air distribution
5 Rear-window heating: ON/OFF
6 Recirculation: ON/OFF
7 A/C compressor: ON/OFF
8 ACC system: ON/OFF
9 Temperature setting: RH side
78 Instruments and controls
The system has five sensors:
• Outdoor temperature sensor
• Interior temperature sensor
• Sun sensor (mounted on top of the fascia)
• Two blended-air temperature sensors
(mounted inside the front floor vents)
Note If anything is placed over the sun sen-
sor, the ACC system will not function prop-
erly.
Panel vents
The panel vents swivel universally, so that
air can be directed as desired. In winter, for
instance, the outer vents can be directed
onto the door windows for enhanced
demisting.
The flow of air through the panel vents can
be controlled individually for each vent by
means of the adjacent control. The climate
control system works best if the panel vents
are open. If you find the air cold or that it is
drafty, start by directing the air away from
the body. If the center vent is aimed up, it will
cool the interior temperature sensor and
you may need to adjust ACC up or down,
depending upon temperature desired.
IB362
Panel vent
IB368
1
2
1 Interior-temperature sensor
2 Sun sensor
79Instruments and controls
Temperature control
The cabin is divided into two temperature
zones:
• The driver’s zone
• The passenger zone (front and rear
seats)
The desired temperature can be set
between 58 and 82°F (15 and 27°C). In
addition, there are also HI and LO settings
(see below). The HI and LO settings for the
passenger zone can only be selected if they
are also selected for the driver’s zone.
The displayed temperature is not the abso-
lute temperature but corresponds to the
comfort level normally experienced at that
temperature after allowance has been
made for the air flow, relative humidity, solar
radiation, etc., currently prevailing inside
the car.
• The most usual temperature setting is
64–76°F (18–24°C), depending on per-
sonal preference and what clothing is
worn.
• It is recommended that changes in the
temperature setting be made in steps of
2°F (1°C).
• Once the desired climate has been
achieved, the rear center vents can be
closed to prevent warm air being distrib-
uted at face height.
Settings when HI selected:
• Maximum heat
• Air distribution to windshield and floor
• Recirculation OFF (even if manually
selected before)
• Fan: high speed
• Settings shown on ACC display
Settings when LO selected:
• Maximum cooling (A/C compressor will
run even if ECON manually selected
before)
• Air distribution through panel vents
• Fan: maximum speed
• Recirculation ON
• Settings shown on ACC display
IB369
Air vent at rear side window
80 Instruments and controls
Functions
Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.
If a manual function is selected, it will be locked in but other functions
will be controlled automatically.
The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.
Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and
recirculation will all be controlled automatically.
In falling temperatures the A/C compressor is
switched off at 32°F (0°C).
In rising temperatures the A/C compressor is
switched on at 41°F (+5°C).
If at the start the outside air temperature is 32–41°F
(0 – +5°C), the A/C compressor is switched off.
• Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous
manual selections.
• Pressing AUTO a second time will result in all the
automatically selected settings being displayed.
When the engine is started, the A/C system is in
AUTO mode, apart from any currently set program,
see page 83 and 84).
IB370
A/C compressor OFF.
No cooling of inlet air. Temperature, air distribution
and fan speed still under automatic control.
ACC system OFF.
Fan OFF.
A/C compressor OFF.
Warm air OFF.
Air-distribution selections locked in current settings.
Recirculation can be selected manually.
Pressing the AUTO button will put the system into
automatic mode.
Pressing the OFF button again will result in the sys-
tem reverting to any previous manual settings.
IB371IB372
81Instruments and controls
The rear-window and door-mirror heating is
controlled manually.
Switch off the heating as soon as the rear window
is clear, to avoid imposing a heavy load on the bat-
tery longer than necessary. Note, however, that the
heating will go off automatically after 2–10 minutes
(depending on the outdoor temperature) or sooner
if the voltage in the electrical system falls below
10 V
.
The ACC system can be programmed to switch on
the heating automatically when the outdoor temper-
ature is below 41°F (+5°C) and the temperature
inside the car is below 50°F (+10°C) (see ”Program-
ming I and II”, on pages 83 and 84).
Recirculation is selected automatically for effective
cooling, but it can also be switched on/off manually.
Although recirculation does not substantially affect
the air quality, it is useful to prevent unpleasant
smells or fumes being drawn into the car from
outside.
IB373
IB374
To increase the fan speed in steps.
If, after being off, the ignition is switched on but the
engine is not started, the fan will run at low speed
until the engine is running.
To decrease the fan speed in steps.
If the fan is set to 0, the A/C compressor will cut out
and ECON will appear on the display.
If, after being off, the ignition is switched on but the
engine is not started, the fan will run at low speed
until the engine is running.
IB375IB376
82 Instruments and controls
Air distribution
Press once: Defrosting of all windows will take
place (air flow to rear side windows shut off) with:
• The fan running at high speed.
• Air being distributed to the defroster vents.
• Normal temperature control will operate.
• Recirculation will be OFF.
• Heating of the rear window and door mirrors will
be switched ON.
The defroster function will continue to operate until
a new selection is made, although the heating for
the rear window and door mirrors will be switched
off automatically after 2–10 minutes, depending on
the temperature outside.
Press twice: Air will be directed onto the windshield
with no increase in the fan speed. The heating for
the rear window will not be switched on.
To revert to the previous selection, press the AUTO
button.
ACC65
Defroster & floor vents
Floor vents and rear side windows
Floor & panel vents
ACC66
A
CC67
A
CC68
83Instruments and controls
Starting in cold weather
To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster set-
ting, maximum heat and low fan speed.
As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor
vents and the fan speed will be increased.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the
fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by
the system.
Starting in hot weather
The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents
at high fan speed and will switch on the A/C compressor (unless the
ECON switch has been pressed).
If the outdoor temperature is above 86°F (30°C), the system might
select recirculation after approximately 45 seconds if this is required
in order to reach the desired temperature.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan
speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system.
Programming I
Manual selections can be programmed into the ACC system so that
these will take effect when the car is started. Note that the ignition
must be switched off for at least ten minutes after programming for
the selections to be saved in the system’s memory.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
2 Select the desired settings.
3 Press and , simultaneously
(the display will flash to confirm that the settings have been
recorded).
Example: If you want air distribution through the panel vents when
you start the car, press and then save the setting by pressing
and .
Cancelling the programmed settings (I)
To cancel the programmed settings, press and
simultaneously (the display will flash to confirm that the settings
have been cancelled).
Panel (and center rear vent)
A
CC69
84 Instruments and controls
Programming II
It is also possible to customize the ACC system, e.g. to adapt to
driving and weather conditions.
Function Operation in AUTO mode
after Programming II Standard operation
in AUTO mode
The A/C compressor will not
activate unless the outdoor
temperature is above 55°F
(+13°C).
–This function saves fuel by
delaying the activation of the
A/C compressor. However,
in wet weather it is advisable
to have the A/C compressor
running when outdoor tem-
peratures are below
57
°F
(+14
°
C), as the A/C system
reduces the likelihood of the
windows fogging up.
A/C compressor cuts
in when outdoor tem-
perature is above 41°F
(+5°C)
Recirculation will be
switched on if the speed of
the car is less than 6 mph (10
km/h) and will be switched off
when the speed has risen
above 20 mph (30 km/h), but
not if the ECON mode has
been programmed according
to ”Programming II”.
–This function is useful to
prevent fumes being drawn
into the car in traffic jams.
Recirculation is
switched on about
45 seconds after start-
ing if the outdoor tem-
perature is above 86°F
(+30°C) and the
selected temperature
for the cabin is well
below the actual tem-
perature in both tem-
perature zones.
The heating will come on
about five seconds after the
engine has started if the out-
door temperature is below
41°F (+5°C).
–This function helps to pre-
vent ice or mist forming on
the rear window in cold,
damp weather. Fuel con-
sumption may increase
slightly.
Rear-window heating
can only be switched
on manually.
85Instruments and controls
To program a function or to cancel a programmed function, press
and hold in the relevant button until the corresponding symbol has
flashed four times on the display and a chime has sounded.
Make sure the ignition is ON.
Example: To have the ACC system switch the heating for the rear
window and door mirrors ON/OFF automatically, press and hold in
until the symbol has flashed four times on the display and a
chime has sounded.
The display shows:
ACC: AUTO
RDEFR CTRL
Once a function has been recorded under ”Programming II”, it will
remain in the system until you cancel the program.
AUTO will still show on the display after a function has been saved
in ”Programming II”.
Calibration
If the battery has been disconnected or has died, the system will
need to be recalibrated.
To start the calibration procedure:
1 Start the engine.
2 Press and simultaneously.
Calibration takes about 30 seconds. During this time and for about
3 seconds after the operation has been completed, the number of
fault codes (if any) stored in the system will appear in the tempera-
ture display on the left. The fault codes themselves will be shown in
the temperature display on the right.
Useful tips
(Before driving the car to an authorized Saab dealer)
• If AUTO is not shown on the display, see ”Cancelling the pro-
grammed settings (I)” on page 83.
• If you suspect that the ACC system is not functioning properly,
cancel (delete) all programmed settings and then recalibrate the
system.
See ”Cancelling the programmed settings (I) and (II)”, pages 83
and 84, and ”Calibration” above.
Note that AUTO will show on the display even if you have com-
pleted Programming II, but that this does not apply to Program-
ming I.
• If the battery has been disconnected or has died, the ACC system
will need to be recalibrated. See ”Calibration” above.
Function Text displayed on SID
during programming Text displayed on SID
when cancelling
program
ACC: LO TEMP
A/C CTRL ACC: NORMAL
A/C CTRL
ACC: RECIRC
ACC: SPEED CTRL ACC: RECIRC
ACC: NORMAL CTRL
ACC: AUTO
RDEFR CTRL ACC: MANUAL
RDEFR CTRL
86 Instruments and controls
Condensation
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-
densation is drained off through two outlets
underneath the floor of the car, in the vicinity
of the front doors.
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
be seen dripping from these outlets when
the car is parked. Greater amounts of con-
densation will result in warmer, more humid
ambient air.
Formation of ice and mist in
extremes of weather
It is only in the most extreme conditions that
icing and misting of window glass are likely
to be a problem, e.g. in torrential rain or
severe cold coupled with high relative
humidity, or when passengers are perspir-
ing heavily or wearing wet clothes.
The following measures are recommended
if such problems should occur:
1 Select AUTO and 70°F (21°C) for both
temperature zones.
2 Select Defroster.
If this is not enough...
3 Increase the fan speed.
If this is not enough...
4 Select a higher temperature.
The following measures are recommended
if the occupants feel that it is cold and drafty
in the car:
1 Make sure that all the air vents are fully
open, including the center rear vent.
If this is not enough...
2 Direct the air flow away from the body
(but not towards the interior temperature
sensor).
If this is not enough...
3 Raise the temperature setting a degree
or two. If this is not enough...
4 Lower the fan speed.
Fault diagnosis and maintenance,
see page 242.
87Instruments and controls
Afterheater, V6-engine
cars
The afterheater enables a comfortable tem-
perature to be maintained inside the car
even after the engine has been switched off.
The heater can be activated up to 10 min-
utes after the engine has stopped, although
the coolant temperature must be at least
104°F (40°C) for the heater to operate.
To start the heater:
1 The ignition should be OFF.
2 Press and hold the AUTO button on the
ACC panel for about a second, until a
chime is sounded and the following
appears on the SID:
”SPARE HEATER
ACTIVATED”.
After five seconds, the SID will indicate how
much heat is available (0–100 %).
To switch off the heater:
1 Press the OFF button on the ACC panel.
The heater will also be switched off if the
ignition is turned ON.
The following settings will be used when the
heater is running:
• Air distribution in AUTO mode.
• Recirculation not active but can be
selected manually.
• Fan speed is automatic and cannot be
changed.
• Only the fan speed is shown on the dis-
play. If AUTO is pressed, the system
selections will be indicated.
The following controls do not operate while
the afterheater is on:
• Rear-window heating.
• ECON.
• User presets.
Some of the functions can be repro-
grammed. For further information, please
consult your Saab dealer (see page 271).
88 Instruments and controls
(This page has been left blank)
89Saab 9-5 Audio System
Saab 9-5 Audio
System
Quick guide to the Saab
9-5 Audio System........... 91
Sound controls................. 93
Radio................................. 94
Cassette player ................ 96
CD player .......................... 99
CD changer....................... 101
Programmable functions. 105
Steering-wheel controls.. 106
Security lock..................... 106
Technical data.................. 107
Fault codes....................... 109
IB1198
90 Saab 9-5 Audio System
To get the best out of your Saab 9-5 Audio
System, we recommend that you read
through this entire section.
The Saab 9-5 Audio System is available in
two versions: Premium on the 9-5 Linear
and Prestige on the 9-5 Arc and 9-5 Aero
(Prestige system is also available as an
option in the U.S. on the 9-5 Linear model.)
Both models have been specially matched
to the Saab 9-5 cabin.
The two systems are comprised of a radio,
CD player and cassette player.
A six-disc CD changer for installation in the
luggage compartment is available as a
dealer-installed accessory/option.
The Premium system has seven speakers:
three mounted in the fascia (the center
speaker further enhances the overall sound
image) and one in each door.
The Prestige system (harman kardon) has
nine speakers (9-5 Sport Wagon has eight
speakers): three mounted in the fascia (the
center speaker further enhances the sound
image), one in each door and two subwoof-
ers in the rear window shelf (9-5 Sport
Wagon: one subwoofer in the luggage com-
partment). The subwoofers enhance repro-
duction of the lowest bass notes.
The Audio System is connected to the Saab
Information Display (SID), which is at the
top of the main instrument panel. Mes-
sages, indicators and the like for the Audio
System are shown on this display.
Indicator
AS Radio is in Autostore mode
RDM Random playback of CD
tracks when CD player
selected
(DOLBY B/C)
DOLBY B/C noise reduction
on for cassette player
91Saab 9-5 Audio System
Quick guide to the
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Radio (see page 94)
ON
To switch the system ON, press the volume but-
ton. The last settings used will be activated.
If the Audio System is switched on when the igni-
tion key is not in the switch, the system will auto-
matically be switched off after one hour has
elapsed since a control button on the radio was
last pressed.
OFF
To switch the system OFF, press the volume
button or remove the ignition key.
VOL
To adjust the volume, rotate the VOL control.
BAL
To adjust the balance between the left and right
channels, pull out and turn the VOL control.
BAS
Press to release the button, and adjust the bass
level. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
TRE
Press to release the button, and adjust the tre-
ble. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
FAD
Press to release the button, and adjust the fade
between the front and rear sets of speakers.
Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
VOL BALON PULLPUSH
TRE FADBAS
Preset station buttons
Press once: play the preset station.
Press & hold briefly: store a new station.
Auto tuning
Press once: auto (seek) tuning.
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound):
manual tuning.
Press once: Autostore ON/OFF.
Press & hold briefly: automatic tuning and
storing of the 6 strongest stations.
Press once: change waveband.
Press once: activate Weather Band.
213
546
SEEK
AS
SEARCH
RADIO
BAND
92 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Cassette player. See page 96
CD player. See page 99
CD changer (accessory/option). See page 101
Press once: Selects cassette player when
other source active.
When tape playing: Dolby B/C ON/OFF.
Switch to playback other side of tape.
Eject.
Press once: Music search (next track).
Press & hold briefly: Fast forward/rewind.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) (a chime will
sound): Blank skip ON/OFF.
Press once: switch to CD player when other
source active.
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound):
Random playback.
Press once: Track search.
Press & hold briefly: Rapid play (passage
search) or Fast track search.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once (a chime
will sound): Switches between Rapid play
(PLAY) and Fast track search (TRACK).
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold briefly (a
chime will sound): Scan disc.
SEEK
CD
RDM
SEEK
Remove CD.
Press once: Change to CD changer when CD
player is active.
Press twice: Change to CD changer when radio
or cassette player is active.
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound):
Random playback of entire magazine.
Press once: Track search on current disc.
Press & hold briefly: Rapid play.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once: Switch
between Rapid play (PLAY) and Fast track
search (TRACK).
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold briefly (a
chime will sound): Scan/disc.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold
(2 chimes): Scan/magazine.
Selects disc in magazine.
CD
RDM
SEEK
213
546
93Saab 9-5 Audio System
Sound controls
ON/OFF
The Audio System will come on:
• When the volume control is pressed.
• When the ignition is switched ON, if the
Audio System was on when the ignition
key was last removed.
The Audio System will be switched off:
• When the volume control is pressed.
• When the ignition key is removed.
• One hour after the ignition was switched
OFF, if the ignition key has not been
removed.
• When one hour has elapsed since a con-
trol button on the Audio System was last
pressed after the ignition key was
removed.
VOL – Volume
BAL – Balance
Pull out and rotate the VOL control to adjust
the balance between the left and right
speakers. When the control is released, it
reverts to the volume function.
BAS – Bass
TRE – Treble
Rotate clockwise to increase the level and
counter-clockwise to reduce it.
The Bass and Treble controls must be
pressed first to release them.
FAD – Fader
The fader control adjusts the balance
between the front and rear sets of speakers.
The Fader controls must be pressed first to
release it.
IB1154
DOLBY B NR
94 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Radio
Press the RADIO/BAND button to switch to
the radio when another source is active.
Preset station buttons (1)
Press once (release within a second) to
select a preset station, e.g.
The small figure on the far right of the dis-
play is the number of the preset button
selected.
Presetting a station
Press and hold in the desired button (for
more than a second) to store the currently
tuned station. During this time, the radio will
be mute. The sound will return as soon as
the station has been stored.
Tuning (2)
Automatic seek tuning:
Press briefly to search for higher fre-
quencies or for lower frequencies.
Manual tuning:
To switch to the manual-tuning function,
press or and release quickly
(a chime will sound and the M indicator will
appear on the display).
The function will revert to automatic seek
tuning two seconds after the last manual fre-
quency change has been made.
Waveband selector (3)
Press the RADIO/BAND button repeatedly
to move through the waveband selections:
FM1, FM2, and AM.
AS, Autostore (4)
The autostore mode provides an additional
preset function that can be used to search
for and to store stations when you are in an
area where you are unfamiliar with the sta-
tions and their frequencies.
Press the AS/SEARCH button to switch the
Autostore mode ON/OFF. When the
Autostore mode is ON, the AS indicator will
show at the bottom of the display.
IB1088
95Saab 9-5 Audio System
Press and hold in the AS/SEARCH button
for more than a second to initiate a search
for the six strongest stations.
Each time the system finds and stores a sta-
tion, the number on the far right of the dis-
play will change. If the system cannot find
six stations with good reception, the remain-
ing preset buttons will be empty. If one of
these empty buttons is pressed, U**** (FM)
or AM**** will appear on the display.
When the system leaves the AS mode, it
returns to the station that was selected
before the AS mode was activated.
The AS mode can also be used in the AM
band.
WB (Weather Band) (5)
Press the WB button to select the Weather
Band mode. The radio will automatically
search for the strongest national weather
service station in the area. When a weather
band station is received, the display indi-
cates ”WB”. The strongest station generally
provides the most accurate information for
the area in which you are traveling.
To exit the Weather Band mode, depress
the WB button again. Weather Band recep-
tion is available in CD, TAPE and RADIO
mode. If the radio is unable to find a suffi-
ciently strong station to lock onto, the unit
will continue to search and the display will
indicate ”NO WB”.
96 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Cassette player
Before playing a tape, make sure that the
label is secure and that the cassette is not
warped, otherwise the cassette can
become jammed in the deck. The cassette
player automatically senses whether the
tape is normal or metal (Type I or Type II).
TAPE (1)
Turn on the cassette player by pressing
or by inserting a cassette in the
deck, with the exposed tape to the right.
Playback will start with the side that is facing
up (indicated by A on the display). The dis-
play will now be as follows:
Playback direction (2)
To play the other side of the tape,
press .
The deck will automatically change the play-
back direction when the end of the tape is
reached, be it during playback, fast
forward/rewind or music search.
Dolby® noise reduction (3)
Press TAPE/DOLBY to switch on Dolby NR
B/C.
Dolby B/C should be on for playback of
tapes recorded with Dolby B/C, and off for
those recorded without Dolby B/C.
Eject button (4)
To stop playback of a tape, press the eject
button or select another source.
If you select another source without press-
ing the eject button, the tape will remain in
the deck but the head and pinch rollers will
be clear of the tape. The same applies if the
Audio System is switched off while a tape is
being played. Tapes can still be ejected
when the system is turned off.
IB1090
VOL
TRE
BALON
FADBAS
PULLPUSH
CD
RDM
RADIO
BAND
AS
SEARCH
213
546
DOLBY B NR
SEEK
3
5
2 4
1
97Saab 9-5 Audio System
Music search forward/reverse (5)
To search forward for a track, press
and release quickly (within half a second).
The following will now appear on the dis-
play:
To perform a backward search, press
instead.
A forward search will continue until a gap of
at least 4 seconds is found, or until you
press or (mid-segment).
Pressing and holding the button during a
search will initiate the fast-forward function.
Fast forward/rewind
Press and hold to start fast-
forward to the end of the tape. The following
will now appear on the display:
Press once to cancel fast-forward.
Press and hold (mid-segment)
briefly to switch to music search.
Fast rewind (<< WIND) is performed in the
same way as fast forward.
Auto music search (Blank skip)
To switch the Blank-skip function ON/OFF,
press and hold (mid-segment).
When the Blank-skip function is active (dis-
play: BL SKIP ON), unrecorded gaps that
are longer than 15 seconds will automati-
cally be skipped.
When auto music search is in progress, the
following will show on the display:
If a track has been recorded at an unusually
low level and is therefore identified incor-
rectly as a gap between tracks, it could ini-
tiate a spurious ”auto music search”.
To cancel such a search, press and hold
(mid-segment) during playback.
The following will now appear on the dis-
play:
98 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Type II (metal) tapes
The cassette has an automatic tape-type
selector.
Cleaning-due indicator
After 30 hours’ playing time, the following
message will appear on the display:
The message will be displayed for ten
seconds each time the cassette player is
selected.
A cleaning tape should be used to clean the
heads inside the cassette player to maintain
good reproduction and to prevent unneces-
sary wear.
To reset the playing-time meter:
1 Remove the current tape.
2 Load the cleaning tape and play it for the
required time.
3 Remove the cleaning tape and reload
the other one.
Tape care
Do not expose cassette tapes to direct sun-
light or to extremes of temperature as this
can damage the cassette and the tape.
Always keep cassettes in their boxes when
not in use.
If a cassette should become jammed in the
deck, contact an authorized Saab dealer.
99Saab 9-5 Audio System
CD player
To select the CD mode, load a CD into the
deck or, if one is already loaded, press the
CD/RDM button.
Insert the CD, label-side up, and allow the
mechanism to load it automatically. Play-
back of the first track will start and the follow-
ing message will appear on the display:
A tiny, amber-colored LED indicator to the
left of the disc tray is illuminated when a disc
is loaded.
When all the tracks have been played, the
CD player will restart playback from track 1.
To cancel playback, press the eject, RADIO
or TAPE button.
Track search (1)
Press or repeatedly to move
to preceding or following tracks. Pressing
once will restart playback from the
beginning of the current track. Thus, to play
the preceding track, press twice.
Rapid play (passage search)
When or is pressed and
held, rapid play will be initiated, with the time
and track showing on the display, e.g.:
If the button is depressed for more than
5 seconds, the rapid play will be even faster.
Rapid play stops when the button is
released.
NOTICE
Do not use writeable CDs in your Audio
System. In certain cases, this type of CD
is only suitable for home use and can
therefore cause operational problems
(overheating).
IB1096
VOL
TRE
BALON
FADBAS
PULLPUSH
CD
RDM
RADIO
BAND
AS
SEARCH
213
546
DOLBY B NR
SEEK
2
1
3
100 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Fast track search
Press (mid-segment) once to
switch between the CD-PLAY and
CD-TRACK modes.
The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes
change the function of and .
The selected mode will also be active the
next time the system is switched on.
Choose the mode that you find most conve-
nient:
Random playback (RDM) (2)
Press and hold the CD/RDM button to
select/deselect random playback of the cur-
rent disc. When this function is selected,
RDM will appear at the bottom of the dis-
play.
Press once to move from the current
track to the next during random playback.
Press once to repeat the current
track during random playback.
Pressing and holding or will
start Rapid play.
SCAN
To start the SCAN function, which enables
you to hear a sample of each track on the
disc, press and hold (mid-seg-
ment). The display shows that SCAN is in
progress and which track is currently being
sampled. For instance, if you started SCAN
while playing the first track, the following
display will appear:
The sample playback starts 30 seconds
after the start of the track and lasts for 8 sec-
onds.
When all the tracks on the disc have been
scanned, the system will revert to playback
of the track that was playing when SCAN
was selected.
Press any segment of the SEEK button
during scanning to play the current track
from the beginning and simultaneously
cancel the SCAN function.
Eject (3)
Press to remove the disc.
If you press the eject button to open the tray
but do not remove the disc, the CD player
will automatically close the tray again after
10 seconds, without restarting playback.
CD PLAY Pressing and holding
or briefly
starts Rapid play
CD TRACK Pressing and holding
or briefly
starts Fast track search
101Saab 9-5 Audio System
CD changer
(accessory)
Important! Always keep the sliding cover
closed to keep dust out of the CD changer,
so that it will continue to provide satisfactory
service for a long time.
To load the CD changer (which is installed
in the luggage compartment and can
accommodate six CDs) proceed as follows:
1 Slide the top back.
2 Lift out the CD magazine.
3 Press back the catch on the magazine.
4 Withdraw one CD tray at a time and
swap/load the CD (label side up).
5 Slide the tray back into the magazine.
Note the position of the magazine for load-
ing (see picture).
Insert the entire magazine carefully inside
the CD changer and slide back the cover.
To select the CD changer
• If the Audio System is in the RADIO or
TAPE mode, press the CD/RDM button
twice.
• If the CD player is active, press the
CD/RDM button once.
If the CDs in the magazine have not been
changed, the system will start playback
from where it left off before.
If there is no magazine in the CD changer,
the following will appear on the display:
NOTICE
Do not use writeable CDs in your Audio
System. In certain cases, this type of CD
is only suitable for home use and can
therefore cause operational problems
(overheating).
IB383
4
3
Changing a CD
IB1341
2
1
CD changer in luggage compartment,
Saab 9-5 Sedan
IB1208
CD changer in luggage compartment,
Saab 9-5 Wagon
102 Saab 9-5 Audio System
If the magazine in the CD changer is empty,
the following will appear on the display:
If the CD changer is activated right after a
magazine has been loaded, the following
will appear on the display:
The CD number will change as each CD is
played.
After a magazine has been loaded, play-
back will start with the first track on the first
CD when the CD changer is selected, and
the following will appear on the display: Selecting CDs (1)
When the CD changer is operating, the
radio preset buttons work for the six CDs in
the magazine. Press the button for the
corresponding CD.
If the selected CD is already being played,
playback will restart from the first track.
If the selected CD-tray is empty, the follow-
ing will appear on the display:
After two seconds, the status of the trays in
the magazine (i.e. loaded or empty) will be
shown on the display, e.g.:
IB1104
VOL
TRE
BALON
FADBAS
PULLPUSH
CD
RDM
RADIO
BAND
AS
SEARCH
213
546
DOLBY B NR
SEEK
3
12
103Saab 9-5 Audio System
If for some reason the CD selected by the
preset button cannot be played, playback of
the current CD will continue.
Track search (2)
Press or repeatedly to move
to preceding or following tracks. Pressing
once will restart playback from the
beginning of the current track. Thus, to play
the preceding track, press twice.
Rapid play
When or is pressed and
held, rapid play will be initiated, with the time
and track showing on the display, e.g.:
If the button is depressed for more than
5 seconds, the rapid play will be even faster.
Rapid play stops when the button is
released.
Fast track search
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once to switch
between the CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK
modes.
The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes
change the function of and .
The selected mode will also be active the
next time the system is switched on.
Choose the mode that you find most
convenient:
CD PLAY Pressing and holding
or briefly
starts Rapid play
CD TRACK Pressing and holding
or briefly
starts Fast track search
IB1104
VOL
TRE
BALON
FADBAS
PULLPUSH
CD
RDM
RADIO
BAND
AS
SEARCH
213
546
DOLBY B NR
SEEK
3
12
104 Saab 9-5 Audio System
SCAN
Scanning the current CD:
To start the SCAN function, which enables
you to hear a sample of each track on the
disc, press and hold (mid-seg-
ment). The display shows that SCAN is in
progress and which track is currently being
sampled. For instance, if you started SCAN
while playing track one, the following dis-
play will appear:
The sample playback starts 30 seconds
after the start of the track and lasts for 8 sec-
onds.
When all the tracks on the disc have been
scanned, the system will revert to playback
of the track that was playing when SCAN
was selected.
Press any segment of the SEEK button
during scanning to play the current track
from the beginning and simultaneously
cancel the SCAN function.
Scanning the entire magazine:
Press and hold (mid-segment -
two chimes) to start a scan of the entire
magazine. A message similar to the follow-
ing will appear on the display:
The sample playback starts 30 seconds
after the beginning of the first track on each
CD and lasts for 8 seconds.
After the first track of each CD has been
sampled, the CD changer will revert to play-
back of the track that was playing when
SCAN was selected.
Press any segment of the SEEK button
during scanning to play the current track
from the beginning and simultaneously
cancel the SCAN function.
Random playback (RDM) (3)
Press and hold the CD/RDM button to
select/deselect random playback of the
CDs in the magazine. When this function is
selected, RDM will appear at the bottom of
the display.
Press once to move from the current
track to the next during random playback.
Press once to repeat the current
track during random playback.
Pressing and holding or will
start Rapid play.
To stop playback from the CD changer,
simply select once to move from the current
track to the next during random playback
(RADIO/TAPE/ CD). The CD changer will
now enter stand-by mode.
105Saab 9-5 Audio System
Programmable
functions
Volume-preset mode
To select the volume-preset mode, press
and hold the WB button at the same time as
you switch the Audio System on.
Use the button to select the
desired function.
The following volume settings can be
preselected:
•STARTVOL – maximum volume level
when the Audio System is switched on
• TEL VOL – preset volume level when an
in-car phone is activated
• SP D VOL – speed-dependent volume.
The Audio System will automatically
adjust the volume level to compensate for
background noise, such as road noise,
which increases with vehicle speed.
• LOUDNESS ON/OFF – boosting of the
highest and lowest frequency ranges to
enhance the sound image when the
volume is set to a low level.
Adjusting the volume
The default setting for START VOL is
volume setting 9, and that for TEL VOL is
volume setting 14 (the highest volume set-
ting is 30).
•Maximum START VOL
•TELVOL
To change the volume setting:
– Press and hold the WB button at the
same time as you switch on the Audio
System.
– Adjust the volume
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new
volume setting.
Speed-dependent volume
(SP D VOL) ON/OFF
To change the default setting:
The default setting for this function is ON.
– Press and hold the WB button at the
same time as you switch on the Audio
System.
– Select SP D VOL using
– Select ON/OFF using the VOL control.
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new
default setting.
Loudness ON/OFF
To change the default setting:
The default setting for this function is ON.
– Press and hold the WB button at the
same time as you switch on the Audio
System.
– Select LOUDNESS using
– Select ON/OFF using the VOL control.
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new
default setting.
WARNING
These functions should only be carried
out when the car is stationary.
106 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Steering-wheel controls
To facilitate use of the Audio System and to
promote safer driving, most of the functions
can be operated using the integral remote
controls on the steering wheel.
Control functions:
NEXT:
RADIO mode: preselect buttons
1⇒2⇒...⇒ 6⇒1⇒...
TAPE mode: Play other side of tape.
CD mode: Inoperative.
CD-changer mode: Select CD in magazine
1⇒2⇒...⇒ 6⇒1⇒...
<< SEEK >>:
RADIO mode: Auto/manual tuning.
TAPE mode:
Music search/Fast forward or rewind.
CD/CD-changer mode:
Track search/Rapid play.
SRC (source)
Press repeatedly to switch between
RADIO ⇒ TAPE ⇒ CD ⇒ (CD changer)
⇒RADIO ⇒...
VOL +/–:
Volume adjust.
Security lock
The Audio System is equipped with an elec-
tronic security lock. The special code is
unique to the car in which the Audio System
is fitted.
Each time the Audio System is switched on,
a check is made to ensure that the codes
match.
If not, the following will appear on the dis-
play:
If a CD changer has been installed, it will
also have been security coded.
If the security code for the CD changer does
not match when the changer is selected, the
following will appear on the display:
If a CD changer is to be retrofitted or if you
wish to move the main Audio System
module and/or CD changer to another car
(Saab 9-5), you
must
consult an authorized
Saab dealer so that the modules can be
given the correct security codes.
IB385
Audio System controls on steering wheel
107Saab 9-5 Audio System
Technical data
• These specifications comply with the new IHF Standard
• Since the policy at Saab is one of continual improvement, we retain the right to alter
specifications and design without prior notice.
• Dolby noise reduction is produced under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation
• ”Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licens-
ing Corporation
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance
could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.
Tone controls
Bass ______________________ ±10 dB at 100 Hz
Treble _____________________ ±10 dB at 10,000 Hz
Power output
Premium __________________ 150 W
110 W at 1 % THD (total har-
monic distortion) and 13.5 V
Prestige __________________ 200 W
150 W at 1 % THD (total har-
monic distortion) and 13.5 V
Radio module
Radio system _______________ PLL dual-synthesizer tuner
Number of presets:
FM ______________________ 3 x 6
AM ______________________ 2 x 6
Frequency range:
FM ______________________ 87.9–107.9 MHz
AM ______________________ 530–1710 kHz
WB_______________________ 162.40–162.55 MHz
Tuning steps:
Automatic seek tuning: _______ FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
WB 50 kHz
Manual tuning: _____________ FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
Frequency range (FM) ________ 40–15000 Hz
±1 dB
Distortion (FM) ______________ < 0.5 %
Cassette player
Fast forward/rewind __________ < 120 seconds (C-60)
Frequency range _____________ 40–16000 Hz
±2 dB
Wow and flutter ______________ 0.2 % WRMS
Signal-to-noise ratio __________ 45 dB
Dolby B/C NR effect __________ 8/16 dB
CD player and CD changer
1-bit system and 8 x oversampling
Frequency range _____________ 20–20000 Hz
±0.5 dB
Distortion __________________ < 0.008 %
Dynamics __________________ > 80 dB (1 kHz)
CD-changer capacity__________ 6 discs
108 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Antennas
The Audio System has three antennas
incorporated in the rear window; two for FM
diversity and one for AM.
The car has a factory-fitted roof antenna for
a mobile phone/OnStar. Roof loads may
negatively affect telecommunication.
Multipath propagation
Multipath propagation occurs when radio
waves from an FM transmitter are reflected
by, e.g. large buildings, causing them to
arrive slightly later than the direct waves.
This can create interference to radio recep-
tion. To avoid this problem as much as pos-
sible the system is equipped with two FM
antennas, so called FM diversity.
NOTICE
Refrain from placing hard or sharp
objects on the rear parcel shelf, to avoid
damaging the antenna leads.
Do not use sun protective film which con-
tains metal particles on the rear window,
this can be the cause of radio interfer-
ence.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of head injuries in the
event of a crash, the headliner and pillar
trims incorporate energy absorbing mate-
rial. These areas must not be modified in
any way. Work on these areas must only
be carried out at an authorized Saab
dealer.
IB386
IB389
IB1743
Accessories and other equipment must
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
these are where the airbags inflate in the
event of a crash
109Saab 9-5 Audio System
Adjusting the frequency steps North
America/Europe
If the car is taken from North America to
Europe, the radio’s frequency steps can be
adjusted.
• Press and hold (mid-segment)
and switch the radio on at the same time.
The preset stations will be cancelled and
replaced by default frequencies.
Fault codes
The Audio System has a built-in diagnostics
function. If a fault is detected, a fault code is
generated to help dealer technicians to
diagnose the fault. Below are the codes for
some faults that you might be able to rectify
yourself.
OnStar System
Your vehicle may be equipped with OnStar,
a vehicle telematics communications and
navigation system. Please consult the sep-
arate chapter in this owner’s manual, page
111.
NOTICE
Great care should be exercised in trying
to rectify a fault. If you are at all unsure,
contact an authorized Saab dealer.
Fault code Possible cause
CD/CDC
ERROR
12/17/19
CD is dirty, loaded
wrong side up or defec-
tive.
TAPE ERR 01 Tape broken or
mechanical fault in
deck.
TAPE ERR
02/03 Tape snarled up or
mechanical fault in
deck.
TAPE ERR 11 Cassette jammed: can-
not be loaded/ejected.
WARNING
The CD player/CD changer is classified
as Class 1 laser equipment
• Service and repair work must only be
carried out by authorized technicians.
• If the casing is damaged, hazardous
laser radiation can occur.
NOTICE
All work on the Audio System must be
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
110 Saab 9-5 Audio System
(This page has been left blank)
111OnStar - Telematics
OnStar - Telematics
Using OnStar................... 112
OnStar is Easy............................ 112
OnStar Services Button.............. 112
Emergency button ...................... 113
White dot button ......................... 113
System status light ..................... 113
The OnStar Center.......... 114
Connecting to the OnStar center 114
Your personal identification number
(PIN)........................................... 114
The OnStar Directions and
Connections Plan......... 114
Automatic notification of air bag
deployment ................................. 114
Emergency services ................... 114
Roadside assistance................... 115
Stolen vehicle tracking................ 115
Accident Assist™........................ 115
OnStar Med-Net.......................... 115
Hands-free communication......... 115
The OnStar Premium
Services Plan 115
Route support............................. 115
Ride Assist.................................. 115
Information and Convenience ser-
vices ........................................... 115
Online Concierge services.......... 116
Additional Services......... 116
Personal Calling:........................ 116
Virtual Advisor: ............... 120
OnStar Subscriber
Website .......................... 121
Limitations....................... 121
Additional Information.... 122
Warranty .................................... 122
A Note About Privacy................. 122
Transferring OnStar.................... 122
OnStar Subscription Information 122
112 OnStar - Telematics
Your new vehicle comes equipped with
advanced telematics hardware and one full
year of Onstar Directions and Connections.
Saab telematics is a sophisticated in-vehi-
cle system allowing convergence of wire-
less communications, GPS (Global Posi-
tioning System) satellites and advanced
vehicle electronics.
You must activate immediately to ensure
you receive your full year of service, as your
prepaid subscription begins at the time of
delivery.
Here’s how to activate your OnStar ser-
vice:
1 Push the blue OnStar button located in
your Saab. After a prerecorded mes-
sage explaining the benefits of OnStar,
you will be greeted by a live OnStar advi-
sor. The advisor will activate your
OnStar service.
2 Provide the information requested by
the advisor to activate your account and
set up your personal profile. This will
take approximately 10–15 minutes.
Using OnStar
Welcome to OnStar. This section gives you
all the information you need to get started
using OnStar, including descriptions of all
OnStar services. It also introduces the
added services of Personal Calling, Virtual
advisor, and the Onstar Subscriber website.
For a complete explanation of these addi-
tional services, please see pages 116, 120
and 121.
NOTE: In order for OnStar to operate, the
car audio system must be switched on.
OnStar is Easy
It’s easy to start using your OnStar system.
In fact, pressing the OnStar button is usually
all you need to do. Once you are connected,
an OnStar advisor will help you with the ser-
vices in your plan.
Inoperative if battery is discharged or
disconnected.
OnStar is powered by your vehicle´s battery
and will not operate if the battery is dis-
charged or disconnected.
Potentially inoperative if vehicle is in a
crash
If your vehicle is in a crash, some compo-
nents could be damaged or disconnected,
potentially rendering OnStar inoperative.
Your onboard OnStar System consists of
three buttons:
OnStar Services Button
Press this button, and you are
connected to an OnStar advi-
sor. You will hear a chime, fol-
lowed by the words
”Connecting to OnStar.” Allow
20–30 seconds for initial con-
nection to the OnStar Call Cen-
ter. An advisor will then help
you with any of the services
included in your OnStar plan.
If cellular service is unavail-
able, OnStar will generate a
fast busy tone. The OnStar sys-
tem will retry calls a number of
times before returning to the
ready mode. To cancel the
automatic dialing, press the
White dot button.
113OnStar - Telematics
System status light
Solid Green — Indicates the OnStar
system in the vehicle is powered ON and
ready to make calls or receive calls from the
OnStar Center.
Blinking Green — The light blinks green to
indicate a call is being connected or in
progress. If you notice this light blinking
while you are not on a call, press the White
dot button.
Red — This signals that your OnStar
system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button to attempt to con-
tact an OnStar advisor. If the connection is
made, the advisor will assist you in making
sure your OnStar system is operating prop-
erly. If you cannot contact the OnStar Cen-
ter, please take your car to the nearest Saab
dealer for diagnosis and service.
The OnStar Center is the heart of your ser-
vice — staffed 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week with knowledgeable OnStar advisors.
Even on weekends and holidays, there is
always someone ready to help.
OnStar uses sophisticated Global Position-
ing System (GPS) satellites to locate your
Saab, and wireless technology to provide
the communications link and seamless inte-
gration into your Saab. This system allows
the OnStar advisors to pinpoint your Saab´s
location precisely. This way, advisors can
provide you with a range of helpful services
to protect you and your Saab. Plus, with the
Premium Services Plan* included for 12
months with your Saab, advisors can also
access an extensive database to assist you
with directions, making reservations and
other convenience services.
*) New retail deliveries only.
Emergency button
In an emergency, press this
button to connect with an
OnStar advisor. Your call will
be given the highest priority,
and you will hear a tone fol-
lowed by the words ”Connect-
ing to OnStar Emergency.” An
advisor will locate your Saab,
find out what kind of assistance
you require, and contact the
nearest emergency services
provider who can dispatch
ambulance, fire, police or other
emergency services. Please
use this button only for true
emergencies.
White dot button
Press this button at the end of a
call. You’ll hear the words
”OnStar Request Ended.” Also,
press this button to answer a
call from the OnStar Center, or
cancel a call if one of the other
buttons is accidentally
pressed. This button is also
used to access OnStar Per-
sonal Calling services which
are described on page 116.
114 OnStar - Telematics
The OnStar Center
Connecting to the OnStar center
In addition to using the 3-button system
found in your Saab, there are two other
ways to connect to the OnStar Center.
Toll-Free Call
To take advantage of your OnStar services
from outside your Saab, you can call OnStar
toll-free at 1-888-4-OnStar
(1-888-466-7827). Remember to have your
Personal Identification Number (PIN)
handy.
Automatic Notification
A priority signal will be sent to the OnStar
Center with your exact location if an airbag
deploys.
(Vehicle electrical system and cellular service
must be operable.)
Your personal identification number
(PIN)
When you signed up with OnStar, you were
asked to provide a Personal Identification
Number (PIN). You’ll need your PIN to
access many of OnStar’s services. If, for
example, your vehicle has been stolen, an
OnStar advisor will ask for your PIN in order
to provide assistance.
Changing your PIN is easy. Call the OnStar
Center and provide the advisor with your
current number, and he or she will assist
you in setting up a new number. If you have
forgotten your PIN, just call the OnStar Cen-
ter. For security reasons, we will send your
PIN to you in the mail.
The OnStar Directions
and Connections Plan
The OnStar Safe and SoundPlan is part of
the Directions and Connections Plan that
comes with your vehicle.* With it, you have
access to a complete range of services pro-
viding you with an unsurpassed level of
safety and security — 24 hours a day, 7
days a week. And you have it all at the touch
of a button.
So whether you’re on a lonesome country
road or stuck in highway traffic, you have at
your disposal a complete range of services
providing you with unsurpassed security.
And you have it all at the touch of a button.
Automatic notification of air bag
deployment
Should your front air bags deploy, a priority
signal will be sent to the OnStar Center with
your Saab´s location (as long as cellular
service and the vehicle’s electrical system
are operable). An advisor will attempt to
contact you to assess the nature of your
emergency, and then notify the appropriate
emergency services provider.
Emergency services
Should you require emergency assistance,
press the red emergency button and On
Star or an advisor will contact the nearest
emergency services provider with your
exact location and your request for help.
* New retail deliveries only.
115OnStar - Telematics
Roadside assistance**
There’s nothing worse than being stranded
on the road with car trouble. No matter what
the problem is (flat tire, out of gas, or engine
trouble), just call OnStar. They will contact
the help you need to get you quickly back on
the road.
Stolen vehicle tracking
OnStar doesn’t just protect you, it protects
your Saab, too. If your vehicle is ever stolen,
just contact OnStar by calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR. They will put you in
touch with the authorities and aid them in
locating your Saab. Ask your insurance car-
rier about possible premium discounts.
Accident Assist™
Accident Assist™ provides step-by-step
guidance about what to do in case of a
crash. Working with leading insurance com-
panies OnStar has developed a ”best prac-
tices” list to assist you through most acci-
dent situations. OnStar Accident Assist™
can make the process of completing a
police report and/or insurance claim less
stressful.
OnStar Med-Net***
OnStar MED-NET securely stores your per-
sonal medical information (e.g., physician’s
name, emergency contacts, medications,
chronic conditions) and, in an emergency,
can quickly send it to a medical facility. This
important information can help assist with
diagnosis and treatment. ****
**There will be no charge for Roadside Assistance as
long as your vehicle is under warranty.
***Requires activation and additional fee.
****Not available in Canada.
Hands-free communication
Talking to an OnStar advisor is easy and
hands-free. Simply press the OnStar but-
ton, and a small microphone picks up your
voice while the OnStar advisor talks to you
through your stereo speakers. Note: Audio
system must be switched on. You can even
adjust the volume to your liking with the
steering wheel controls or the radio volume
knob. Your hands remain on the steering
wheel, while your eyes remain on the road.
Being safe on the road is important, but
there’s more to life than security. There’s liv-
ing. That’s why we have created the OnStar
Directions and Connections Plan. It gives
you not only the important protections of the
Safe and Sound Plan, but also a whole
range of services which truly change driving
from a chore to a luxury. All new Saab
models come with one full year of the
OnStar Directions and Connections Plan.*
* New retail deliveries only.
The OnStar Premium
Services Plan *
Route support
With OnStar Route Support, an advisor can
help you find your way, no matter how far off
course you are. You can get exact street
directions, or guidance to nearby gas sta-
tions, restaurants, hotels or ATMs.
Ride Assist
If you need a lift, anytime of the day or night,
just call OnStar. They’ll contact transporta-
tion and send it right to you.
Information and Convenience ser-
vices
OnStar advisors have access to over five
million service listings including hotels, res-
taurants, gas stations, dealerships, hospi-
tals, ATMs and airports — more than 250
service categories in all. OnStar advisors
can even assist you with hotel and restau-
rant reservations.
*All Saab models come with a full year of Premium Ser-
vice. New retail deliveries only.
116 OnStar - Telematics
Online Concierge services
From shopping to travel to entertainment
and more, OnStar’s online concierge can
help you make the most of your time. Login
to www.myonstar.com and simply select a
city, choose a category and ask away. Get
instant answers in a live online chat with an
OnStar Advisor or send an email if you pre-
fer. You can also view OnStar’s recommen-
dations for top picks in eight categories like
dining, travel and sports and recreation.
Additional Services
Personal Calling
As an OnStar Safe and Sound Plan or
Directions and Connections Plan sub-
scriber, you have access to OnStar Per-
sonal Calling. OnStar Personal Calling pro-
vides you with a nationwide wireless phone
service in your Saab that you can activate
simply by pressing a button and using your
voice. You can use Personal Calling in your
Saab to place or to receive calls. The
voice-activated system will dial the number.
Your party will answer through your stereo
speakers.
With OnStar Personal Calling, you can
enjoy the simplicity of a one-touch wireless
connection. Whether you are placing or
receiving a call, once you press the button,
you never have to take your hands off the
wheel or your eyes off the road. The ease of
the hands-free communication service
allows you to enjoy an even greater level of
safety, security and convenience while driv-
ing.
This new service is not yet available in all
areas. Complete availability in the U.S. is
anticipated in 2001*. For system limitations
and details, call OnStar at
1-800-ONSTAR-7.
* Availability in Canada was undetermined at time of
publication. Please contact your local dealer in Canada.
Signing Up for Personal Calling
As an OnStar subscriber, the Personal Call-
ing capability is already built into your
Saab’s OnStar hardware. In order to use
this service, an OnStar advisor must set up
your cellular account. You must also pro-
vide a credit card in order to establish your
prepaid cellular account. Usage charges
will be deducted from this prepaid account
of ”units.” Units are easily replenished using
the credit card on file at OnStar. Once you
sign up for OnStar Personal Calling, you will
be given your own personal phone number
that others can use to call into your Saab.
To sign up for Personal Calling,
simply
• Press the OnStar button in your Saab.
• Inform the advisor that you would like to
sign up for Personal Calling.
• The advisor will set up your account.
You will need to provide account and
credit card information.
117OnStar - Telematics
Voice Commands
Personal Calling is made available through
your voice commands to the system. This
allows you to verbally control all of the
phone functions.
Your OnStar wireless phone system has
been programmed to respond to a wide vari-
ety of voices and accents. You should
speak distinctly in a normal speaking vol-
ume. It is not necessary to exaggerate your
voice or to speak loudly. Speak numerical
digits one at a time, and then wait for confir-
mation before going to the next digit.
Voice Command Error Messages
Pardon – The system has not been able to
match your command with a word that it
knows. Repeating the command distinctly
should fix the problem.
Slower Please – Repeat the command
after a short pause. This response normally
happens if you say a command before the
system is ready for it or if there is substantial
background noise.
Universal Commands
Help – The system will provide a list of avail-
able commands.
Clear – When you are entering digits, this
command will erase the last digit entered.
Cancel – This command takes you from the
current function to the ”Ready” prompt. If the
last response from the system was ”Ready,”
this command will exit voice recognition.
Placing a Call
There are three ways to place a call:
1 By using a particular number, say ”DIAL”
2 By using a stored nametag, say ”CALL”
3 By dialing the last number, say
”REDIAL”
To dial a number:
To dial using a ”Nametag”:
To redial the last number dialed:
Receiving a Call
If someone calls your wireless phone num-
ber, the entertainment system in your Saab
will mute (if it is on), and you will hear a
phone ringing sound. To answer the call,
simply press the White Dot button.
Ending a Call
When your call is finished, press the White
Dot button to end the call. It is not possible
to end a call using voice commands.
1 Press the
OnStar White
Dot button
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
2 Say ”DIAL” OnStar will respond
”Number Please”
3 Say the 1st
Digit OnStar will repeat the
number
4 Say the 2nd
Digit OnStar will repeat the
number
Continue saying numbers in this man-
ner until finished
5 Say ”DIAL” OnStar will respond
”Dialing <number>,”
then make the call
1Press the
OnStar White
Dot button
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
2 Say ”CALL” OnStar will respond
”Nametag Please”
3Say ”<stored
nametag>” OnStar will respond
”Calling <nametag>”,
then make the call
1Press the
OnStar White
Dot button
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
2 Say ”REDIAL” OnStar will respond
”Redialing”, then
make the call
118 OnStar - Telematics
Storing/Deleting Numbers in
Memory
(Nametags)
Storing a number
Your OnStar system can store up to 20
numbers (up to 32 digits each) in memory
that can be dialed by simply repeating the
”nametag.”
To store a number:
Deleting a Number from Memory
To delete a nametag:
Setting Tone or Voice Response
Your system comes from the factory with
voice responses to your commands to con-
firm that the system received the command
or number you intended. For example,
when you are entering a number, OnStar
repeats the number back to you. You may
change the system to respond with a tone
response if you prefer. A ready tone, a digit
tone, or a goodbye tone will respond instead
of the voice. All other responses will still be
by voice.
Units Remaining
OnStar keeps track of the amount of calling
time you have purchased and used in units.
The number of total remaining units is
stored within the OnStar system, and can be
accessed easily.
Adding More Calling Minutes / Units
You can charge additional calling units with
automatic refill by contacting OnStar, or by
authorizing automatic unit refill on the
OnStar subscriber website. For more infor-
mation about the OnStar subscriber web-
site, please see page 121.
Automatic Replenishment
If you run out of units during a call, your call
will be terminated and you will be connected
to OnStar for approval to replenish. You will
be warned at the beginning of a call when
you have ten or fewer calling units remain-
ing.
1Press the
OnStar White
Dot button
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
2 Say ”STORE” OnStar will respond
”Number Please”
3 Say the 1st
Digit OnStar will repeat the
number
4 Say the 2nd
Digit OnStar will repeat the
digit
Continue saying numbers in this manner
until finished
5 Say ”STORE”
again OnStar will respond
”Nametag Please”
6Say ”<new
nametag>” OnStar will respond
”Again”
7Say ”<new
nametag>” OnStar will respond
”Once More”
8Say ”<new
nametag>” OnStar will respond
”Storing <nametag>”
1 Press the
OnStar White
Dot button
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
2 Say ”DELETE” OnStar will respond
”Nametag Please”
3Say
”<nametag>” OnStar will respond
”Delete <nametag>,
YES or NO”
4 Say ”YES” OnStar will respond
”Deleting <nametag>”
1 Press the
OnStar White
Dot button
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
2Say ”Voice
Feedback” OnStar will respond
”Voice Feedback is
now ON/OFF”
1Press the
OnStar White
Dot button
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
2 Say ”Units” OnStar will respond
”Verify or Add”
3 Say ”Verify” OnStar will respond
”You have # units
remaining”
119OnStar - Telematics
Contact OnStar
You will need your OnStar Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN) to authorize the
charge to your credit card on file.
If you are not in your Saab, you may call an
OnStar Advisor at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to request unit replenish-
ment.
Security/Locking your System
You can set up a four-digit Personal Secu-
rity Code to ensure that unauthorized
people do not use the calling capability of
your system. With security set to ON, the
system will not allow any personal calls. You
must turn security OFF before calls can be
made.
Volume Control
The volume of the audio portion of Personal
Calling is controlled with your steering
wheel volume controls or with the radio
volume knob.
1Press the
OnStar
White Dot
button
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
2 Say ”Units” OnStar will respond
”Verify or Add”
3 Say ”Add” You will be connected to
OnStar for replenish-
ment
1 Press the
OnStar White
Dot button
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
2 Say ”Security” OnStar will respond
”Enter Four-Digit
Security Code”
3 Say the 1st Digit OnStar will repeat
the digit
4 Say the 2nd Digit OnStar will repeat
the digit
5 Say the 3rd Digit OnStar will repeat
the digit
6 Say the 4th Digit OnStar reply ”Secu-
rity (code # # # #) is
now ON/OFF”
120 OnStar - Telematics
Virtual Advisor
(expected availability fourth quarter 2000)
Once you have activated Personal Calling,
you can enjoy your time in your Saab even
more with the OnStar Virtual Advisor. This
service allows you to listen to your favorite
news and information topics, such as
weather reports, stock quotes and sports
scores. You can even listen to your e-mail,
whenever you want, without ever taking
your eyes off the road. Using simple voice
commands, you can browse your personal
topics and skip or listen to those you
choose. You can also search for additional
information on special topics that interest
you.
To find out how to set up a customized pro-
file, visit the OnStar subscriber website at
www.onstar.com, or turn to the OnStar sub-
scriber website section on page 31 of this
guide. If you do not have Internet access,
you can still take advantage of the OnStar
Virtual Advisor services as a default profile
will be set up for you. *
*Availability in Canada was undetermined
at the time of publication. Please contact
your local dealer in Canada.
Calling the Virtual Advisor
Getting Information from the Virtual
Advisor
The OnStar Virtual Advisor will prompt you
for information you desire. These offerings
will change to provide you with services and
information that you and other subscribers
want and need. The prompts are very clear
and easy to understand and use.
Information Available
OnStar will continue to add new features
and categories to the Virtual Advisor. The
following general categories will give you an
overview of the types of information avail-
able to you. For complete up-to-date cate-
gories, you can go to the Saab Cars USA,
Inc. website at www.saabusa.com or the
OnStar website at www.onstar.com, and
then click on the link to the subscriber web-
site.
Weather
The OnStar Virtual advisor will deliver an
up-to-date weather forecast for the current
location of the vehicle. The forecast
includes current temperature, daily
high/low, tomorrow’s high/low, precipitation
forecast, and unusual conditions.
Stock Quotes
The OnStar Virtual advisor can provide you
with current quotes for the stocks you have
specified in your customized profile as well
as other requested stocks. All market data
is delayed by twenty minutes. If you have
not set your profile, you can still access the
stock quote feature through your default
profile and then request the stock of your
choice.
Sports Scores
The OnStar Virtual advisor can provide you
with scores for your favorite college and pro-
fessional teams with up-to-the- minute high-
lights, even if they are being broadcast on a
local station. See the team selection option
in your Mobile Profiler section of the sub-
scriber section of OnStar.com.
If you have not set your profile or are still
using the default profile, you can access the
sports option of the Virtual advisor and ask
for an update on your favorite sport. You
always have access to the options in the Vir-
tual Advisor.
1 Press the
OnStar White
Dot button
OnStar will respond
”Ready”
2Say ”Virtual
Advisor” You will be connected
to Virtual Advisor
121OnStar - Telematics
News Headlines
The OnStar Virtual Advisor will provide cur-
rent headlines for many different catego-
ries, including:
• International News Headlines
• National News Headlines
• Technology Headlines
• Business Headlines
• Sports Headlines
• Entertainment Headlines
E-mail Reader
The OnStar Virtual Advisor allows you to lis-
ten, and soon respond, to your e-mails any
time you want. E-mail availability is based
on the address(es) you provide to OnStar.
Every Virtual Advisor enrollee will receive
an E-mail account.
OnStar Subscriber
Website
As an OnStar subscriber, you have access
to the OnStar subscriber website. The sub-
scriber website will provide you with impor-
tant facts about your OnStar subscription
and allow you to customize your Virtual
Advisor Mobile Profile. All this allows you to
access up-to-the-minute information that
can make your driving experience safer and
more enjoyable.
The subscriber website was designed to
provide you with easy access to personal-
ized information, learn more about OnStar,
update your account information, plan your
travel, receive weather information and
interact with OnStar.
You can also act like an OnStar advisor and
pinpoint your Saab. To access the sub-
scriber website, simply go to
www.onstar.com, and then click on the
OnStar subscriber link. The OnStar Sub-
scriber website is a secured site that is
password protected. You will be required to
provide your OnStar account number and
personal identification number (PIN). If you
do not know your account number or PIN,
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR. For
security reasons, your PIN will be mailed to
your address on record.
Limitations
Not withstanding anything contained
herein, OnStar's nonperformance hereun-
der shall be excused if caused by act or
omission of a cellular carrier or a third-party
service provider, equipment failure, acts of
God, strikes, equipment or facility shortage,
or other causes beyond OnStar’s reason-
able control. In addition, the liability of
OnStar, if any, for any mistake, omission,
interruption, delay, error, defect or other fail-
ure in the service furnished, or in the equip-
ment used in furnishing service, shall in no
event exceed the amount of OnStar’s
charges to subscriber for said service
during the period so affected, provided that
no liability shall result for outages of 24
hours or less.
This manual includes the latest information
at the time it was printed. We reserve the
right to make changes to the products and
services without prior notification.
In order to provide you with excellent ser-
vice, any call to the OnStar Center may be
monitored or recorded.
All features may not be available on all mod-
els. Please consult your dealer for details.
122 OnStar - Telematics
OnStar Operation:
OnStar uses existing emergency service
providers and cellular and satellite technol-
ogies. OnStar requires cellular service to be
available and operating for features to func-
tion properly.
Personal Calling:
Existing OnStar service agreement
required. Additional usage charges apply
for Personal Calling. Interim 2001 model
year availability in select markets. For
system limitations and details, call
1-800-ONSTAR-7 or visit www.onstar.com.
Virtual Advisor:
Existing OnStar and Personal Calling ser-
vice agreement required. Additional usage
charges apply for Personal Calling. Interim
2001 model year availability in select mar-
kets. For system limitations and details, call
1-800-ONSTAR-7 or visit www.onstar.com.
Additional Information
Warranty
OnStar is warranted as part of the Saab new
vehicle limited warranty.
A Note About Privacy
At OnStar, we know you want to protect your
privacy, and we take subscriber privacy
very seriously. We never provide your per-
sonal information to another company or
person unless you authorize it, or we are
required to by the legal process, or in such
cases where you have provided it for billing
purposes or you have requested a hotel res-
ervation, are sending flowers, etc. Having
this information on file with OnStar is a real
advantage and helps you avoid repeating
your credit card information over a cellular
connection. Your trust is what we most
value.
Transferring OnStar
Because your OnStar 3-button system is an
integral part of your Saab, it cannot be trans-
ferred to another vehicle. Each OnStar
system stays with the original car or truck in
which it was installed.
The one-year OnStar prepaid subscription
applicable to new retail deliveries cannot be
transferred to another vehicle. However, if
you’ve purchased additional years of ser-
vice and decide to dispose of your Saab,
any remaining service will be refunded to
you. Or, if you choose, you can have it trans-
ferred to another vehicle on your account.
Any service that is refunded or transferred
will be prorated at the monthly rate in effect
at the time of transfer.
OnStar Subscription Information
To renew your subscription or upgrade your
plan, just push the OnStar button, or call the
OnStar customer service department at
1-888-864-2801 between 7 am and 12 pm
EST Monday-Friday; 8 am and 5 pm on Sat-
urday.
123Interior equipment and trunk
Interior equipment
and trunk
Steering wheel
adjustment..................... 124
Rearview mirrors............. 125
Electric windows............. 131
Sunroof ............................ 132
Interior lighting................ 134
Sun visors........................ 135
Ashtrays........................... 135
Glove compartment ........ 136
Cup holders..................... 138
Trunk................................ 139
Spare wheel and tools.... 149
Fuel filler door................. 150
Opening the fuel filler
door in an emergency... 150
IB394
124 Interior equipment and trunk
Steering wheel
adjustment
Fore-and-aft and tilt adjustment of the steer-
ing wheel is possible.
Pull down the lever fully until you hear a
click. Move the steering wheel to the desired
position and then raise the lever. The lever
should lock with a click.
Make sure that the lever is fully locked
before driving off.
Horn
The horn is sounded by pressing the central
part of the steering wheel. Press closest to
the steering wheel rim.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel unless
the car is stationary.
IB408
To adjust the steering wheel
IB1563
125Interior equipment and trunk
Rearview mirrors
Door mirrors
The door mirrors have auto dimming func-
tion (option) and the passenger side door
mirror is of the wide-angle ‘‘aspheric” type.
The door mirrors are designed to fold back
if knocked. They can also be fully retracted
for parking in tight spaces, such as on the
car deck of a ferry. Remember to fold them
out again before driving off.
The adjusting switch is on the driver’s door.
If the car is equipped with a programmable
driver’s seat, the settings of the door mirrors
can also be stored in the preset buttons for
the seat (see page 14).
Cars equipped with a programmable
driver’s seat also have the ability to angle
the passenger’s mirror down when revers-
ing, e.g. for a better view of the curb.
1 Select reverse.
2 Press the tiny button adjacent to the
doormirror switch to tilt the mirror. The
mirror will be reset automatically when
reverse gear is deselected.
The mirror glass can also be adjusted man-
ually by gently pressing the glass in the
desired direction.
The mirrors are heated, and the heating
comes on and goes off with the rear-window
heater.
NOTICE
The door mirrors should be fully retracted
before the car enters an automatic car
wash.
Adjusting the door mirrors
1 Select mirror
2 Use touch pad to adjust mirror
Door mirror folded in
IB568
Button for angling passenger’s mirror
down on reversing
126 Interior equipment and trunk
Rearview mirror
The rearview mirror has day/night positions
that can be selected by means of a knob
beneath the mirror. Adjust the mirror in day
position.
Interior rearview mirror with garage
opener, autodimming and compass
(certain variants only)
Retain your original garage door transmitter
for future programming procedures (i.e.,
new vehicle purchase). It is also suggested
that upon the sale of the vehicle, the pro-
grammed garage opener buttons be erased
for security purposes.
WARNING
Make sure that people and objects are out
of the way of a moving door or gate to pre-
vent potential harm or damage.
When programming the garage opener,
you may be operating a garage door or
gate operator.
Do not use the garage opener with any
garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by
federal safety standards. (This includes
any garage door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982.). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an
object, signalling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death.
Rearview mirror
1 Day position
2 Night position
Buttons for garage opener and compass
1-3 Garage opener
4 LED
5 Compass/auto dimming ON/OFF
6 Compass bearing
127Interior equipment and trunk
Preparations for first-time programming
Before programming the garage opener for
the first time, you must delete any factory
codes.
Press and hold buttons 1 and 3 for about
20 seconds until the LED starts to flash.
This will delete the factory codes and initiate
the programming phase.
Programming the garage opener
The garage opener can record and store the
frequencies of three different remote con-
trols.
The battery in the remote control should be
fairly new for programming to work well.
1 Turn the ignition to ON.
2 Hold the garage door remote control
3–7 cm from the rearview mirror. Sit
where you can see the LED (4) during
programming.
3 Press the remote control button and the
desired button on the rear view mirror at
the same time.
4 The LED will now start to flash, slowly at
first and then rapidly. The rapidly flash-
ing LED indicates that programming is
complete and that you can release the
buttons.
Reprogramming a button that has previ-
ously been programmed
1 Press and hold the desired button on the
rearview mirror for the entire program-
ming sequence.
2 The LED starts to flash slowly after
20 seconds.
3 Hold the garage door remote control
3 –7 cm from the rearview mirror and
press the button on the remote control.
4 Reprogramming is complete when the
LED starts to flash rapidly.
The previous frequency is now erased and
replaced by the new one. Reprogramming
one button does not affect the other buttons.
Complete erase
Completely erase the memory of the garage
opener by pressing and holding buttons 1
and 3 simultaneously for 20 seconds. Con-
firmation is provided by the LED flashing
rapidly for 10 seconds.
A complete erase deletes the frequencies
from all three buttons. It is not possible to
erase the memory of a single button.
Opening a garage door
Press and hold the appropriate button until
the garage door starts to open.
You can of course still use the original
garage door remote control after you have
programmed the garage opener in the rear-
view mirror.
Garage doors with rolling security codes
Garage doors with rolling security codes
manufactured after 1996 can be identified
as follows:
• Read the garage door’s instruction man-
ual.
• Programming the garage opener in the
rearview mirror seems to be successful
but the garage door does not open.
• Press and hold the programmed button.
The garage door uses a rolling security
code if the LED flashes rapidly and after
2 seconds shines constantly.
128 Interior equipment and trunk
If the garage door remote control uses roll-
ing security codes, proceed as follows
having programmed the garage opener:
1 Localise the button labelled "learn" or
"smart" on the motor unit of the garage
door. The location and colour of this
button varies between makes.
2 Press and release the "learn" button on
the motor unit. Step 3 must be per-
formed within 30 seconds of Step 2.
3 Press the programmed button on the
rearview mirror twice (some garage
doors require the button to be pressed
three times; refer to the door’s instruc-
tion manual).
Gate programming & Canada program-
ming
The remote control may stop transmitting
during programming. If so, continue to hold
the button on the rearview mirror and
release and press the button on the remote
control every other second, "cycling" until
programming is completed.
The LED will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. The rapidly flashing LED indicates
that programming is complete and that you
can release the buttons.
NOTICE
Switch off the power supply to the garage
door or gate (or park the car beyond the
range of the remote control) while pro-
gramming using the "cycling" method to
prevent damaging the electrical motor.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
must accept any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of this device.
129Interior equipment and trunk
Rearview mirrors with auto dimming
function (accessory/option)
The autodimming is activated and deacti-
vated with a short push on button 2.
If the mirror is equipped with Garage Door
Opener (option) the letter 1 is displayed on
compass bearing display briefly when auto
dimming is activated. When deactivating
the letter 0 is displayed.
The interior rearview mirror has two sen-
sors, one forward-facing and one rear-fac-
ing. They also activate and deactivate the
auto dimming feature on door mirrors.
The system is activated when the for-
ward-facing sensor detects that it is dark
outside and the rear-facing sensor detects.
For example, if the car following has not
dimmed its headlights. The rearview mirrors
are then darkened to prevent the strong light
source from dazzling the driver. This dark-
ening is stepless.
The mirrors return to their normal states
when the strong light source diminishes.
The auto dimming function can be turned
OFF with the switch on the lower edge of the
rear-view mirror.
NOTE
Towing a trailer can cause the system to
malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may
sense light from the trailer.
1 Forward-facing sensor
2 ON/OFF switch, auto dimming function
3 Rear-facing sensor
130 Interior equipment and trunk
Compass
The compass is integrated in the rearview
mirror. The compass bearing is displayed in
the top right-hand corner of the mirror and is
updated every other second. The compass
displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,
E, etc.
Switch the compass display on and off by
pressing button 5 for 3 seconds.
Changing zones
The earth’s magnetic fields vary depending
on one’s position on the globe. If you drive
your car from one magnetic zone to another
the compass setting will need to be changed
to ensure a correct bearing.
1 Study the illustrations to determine the
correct zone.
2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is
shown in the display on the mirror (6 s).
The zone number setting now is also
shown.
3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the
zone number. There are 15 zones from
which to choose. Once the correct zone
is selected, release the button and wait
4 seconds. The compass will now
display the bearing.
Calibration
Calibration is performed automatically
during travel. If an accessory, such as a
mobile phone, is fitted and it can be
assumed that the compass is affected, the
compass may need to be calibrated manu-
ally.
1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and
the compass bearing are displayed
(approx. 9 s).
2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or
drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer
displayed.
Compass zones in USCompass zones in Canada
131Interior equipment and trunk
Electric windows
The electric motors of the front windows are
equipped with overload protection (inte-
grated thermal protection). This protection
operates when the windows are wound
down automatically (switch pressed fully
down).
To open:
Front windows: press the front of the switch
Rear windows: Press the back of the switch.
The switches for the front windows have a
third position for automatic opening of the
window. Press the switch fully down to lower
the window completely.
To cancel automatic lowering of the win-
dow, lift the switch briefly.
To close:
Front windows: Lift the front of the switch.
Rear windows: Lift the back of the switch.
The actuating motor will be switched off
automatically when the window is fully
closed or when the switch is released.
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when the
side windows are being wound up.
•Always remove the ignition key when
you leave the car to prevent personal
injury caused by the electric windows,
for example, due to children playing.
• The person operating the electric win-
dows is responsible for ensuring that
no one, especially children, has their
head, hands or fingers in the window
openings, before raising the windows.
Raising the windows could otherwise
cause serious or fatal injuries.
IB429
1 Window switches
2 Switch for rendering rear door window switches inoperative
132 Interior equipment and trunk
Child safety: rear windows (ON/OFF)
The window switches on the rear doors can
be rendered inoperative by the ON/OFF
switch in the panel on the center console.
When the switch is ON, the rear side win-
dows can be operated by the switch on each
rear door. The switch’s back lighting will be
activated.
When the switch is OFF, the rear side win-
dows can only be operated from the panel
on the center console. When off, the
switch’s back lighting will also be switched
off.
Sunroof
(Option in Canada)
The sunroof is operated by the switch on the
overhead panel above the rearview mirror.
The sunroof can be opened partially or fully.
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the sunroof.
•Always remove the ignition key when
you leave the car to prevent personal
injury caused by the electric sunroof,
for example, due to children playing.
• The person operating the electric sun-
roof is responsible for ensuring that no
one, especially children, has their
head, hands or fingers in the opening,
before closing the sunroof. Operating
the sunroof could otherwise cause
serious or fatal injuries.
IB445
Switch for rear side window
133Interior equipment and trunk
To open:
• Slide the control towards the rear to open
the sunroof to the comfort position.
To open it fully, slide the control back a
second time. Press the control to stop it
earlier.
To close:
• Slide the control forwards until the sun-
roof is closed.
Ventilation position
• Press the middle of the control (when sun-
roof closed).
• To close: slide the control forwards.
To fully open the sunroof from the ventila-
tion position, slide the control back.
The sunroof incorporates an interior, man-
ual, sliding sun blind.
After the car has been waxed, the sunroof
may squeak or squeal on opening to the
ventilation position. If this should occur, fully
open the sunroof and, using washer fluid,
wash the seal along the front edge, together
with the paintwork that is in contact with the
seal when the roof is closed.
Emergency operation of sunroof
In an emergency (e.g. if there is an electrical
failure) the sunroof can be operated by a
screwdriver. Remove the cover at the front
of the sunroof opening, insert a screwdriver
in the groove, and rotate.
Rotate counterclockwise to close sunroof.
IB430
13
2
Sunroof control
1 To open
2 To close
3 Ventilation position
IB431
Manual operation of sunroof
134 Interior equipment and trunk
Interior lighting
The interior lighting consists of one dome
light in the front and one in the back, a
map-reading light in the front, two reading
lights in the back, floor courtesy lights in the
front (in some model variants) and door
courtesy lights on all doors.
The courtesy lights come on automatically
when the respective door is opened. Each
reading light has its own switch adjacent to
the lamp.
The switch for the dome lights is on the front
overhead panel. When the switch is in the
mid-position (door-activated), the interior
lighting will come on:
• When the car is unlocked from the out-
side.
• When any door is opened.
• When the ignition key is withdrawn from
the ignition switch.
When the switch on the overhead panel is in
the mid-position, the lighting is switched off
automatically 30 seconds after the last door
has been closed or when the ignition is
switched ON.
There is also a light in the sun visors. The
light comes on when the cover over the
vanity mirror is opened.
When the ignition is OFF, if a door has been
left open for 20 minutes, the interior lighting
will be switched off automatically to save the
battery.
Luggage-compartment lighting
The luggage-compartment lighting comes
on automatically when the trunk is opened
and goes out when the trunk is closed.
The lighting will also be switched off auto-
matically after 20 minutes if the trunk has
been left open.
1
2
3
IB357
12
1
IB358
1 Reading lights
2 Dome light
1 Interior lighting on continuously
2 Lighting comes on when a door is opened
3 Lighting always off
135Interior equipment and trunk
Sun visors
The car is equipped with double sun visors.
One section of the visor can be indepen-
dently pivoted to the side window.
A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the
sun visors. The vanity mirrors are illumi-
nated when the cover is raised.
Ashtrays
(accessory)
The car can be equipped with three ash-
trays: one in the instrument panel fascia,
and one in each rear door. A cigarette lighter
is fitted adjacent to the front ashtray, and
there is also one in the back of the center
console.
Front ashtray
1 To open the ashtray, push gently on the
center/upper part of the front and
release to allow it to spring out.
2 Close the ashtray in the same way.
To remove the ashtray, open it and after that
pull left side out at an angle.
To refit, line up the slots on either side and
slide it closed.
Rear ashtrays
Open the lid to use ashtray.
To remove the ashtray, fully open the lid and
lift the ashtray straight out.
To refit the ashtray, make sure it engages
the two square recesses in the door trim.
IB1180
Sun visor
IB1285
1
2
Front ashtray
1 Press soft to open/close
2 Pull out one side at an angle
IB434
Rear ashtray
136 Interior equipment and trunk
Cigarette lighters
(accessory/certain markets only)
The car is provided with cigarette lighters
next to the front ashtray and in the rear end
of the center console.
The cigarette lighter socket can also be
used as power point, e.g. for a mobile
phone. The ignition should be in the ON
position.
The cigarette lighter sockets can also be
used for accessories (e.g. to charge a
mobile phone) when the ignition is ON.
Glove compartment
The glove compartment can be cooled by
the air conditioning (ACC) system. Cold air
can be directed to the glove compartment
for keeping drinks cool, etc.
Slide the cover towards you to admit cold
air.
Additional storage facilities are provided
(see next page).
WARNING
The maximum combined load for the two
cigarette lighter sockets is 240 W (20 A).
WARNING
The glove compartment must be closed
while travelling. An open glove compart-
ment door could cause leg injuries in the
event of a crash.
IB1115
1
2
Glove compartment.
1To lock
2 To unlock
IB1286
Sliding cover in glove compartment to
admit cold air
137Interior equipment and trunk
IB436
IB437
IB439
IB440
IB441 IB438
On the back of the front seats
Center armrest for rear seat
At bottom of door pillars adjacent to
front-seat backrests
On leading edge of front seats
Console between front seats
In the doors
138 Interior equipment and trunk
Cup holders
Cup holders are provided in the instrument
panel fascia, in the center console compart-
ment between the front seats, and in the
rear-seat armrest.
To access the cup holder in the instrument
panel, press the symbol and release.
To access the cup holder in the rear seat
armrest, lower the armrest and press the
front edge of the holder. Close in the same
way.
The number of cup holders provided may
vary between models.
WARNING
• The cup holder should not be used to
hold cups made of china, glass or hard
plastic as these can cause injury in the
event of a crash.
• Use only for paper cups or aluminium
cans.
• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot
drinks.
• Avoid putting oversized cups in the
cup holder.
NOTICE
Take care not to spill any liquid on the
audio system when using the cup
holders. Soft drinks in particular can
cause malfunction.
IB1153
1
2
Cup holder in center console
IB443
Cup holder in rear armrest
Press the edge to open/close.
IB444
Cup holder in fascia
1 Press symbol to open
2 Lift bottom to close
139Interior equipment and trunk
Trunk
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan
The rear seat is split and the two sections can be folded indepen-
dently. Folding down of the rear seat is easier if the front seats are
not all the way back, and the rear head restraints are folded down.
1 Raise the rear seat cushions by pulling the loop located between
the cushion and the backrest. A small pad will open up first. Con-
tinue pulling the loop until the entire rear seat cushion is raised.
2 Tip the seat cushion forward.
3 Press the button adjacent to the respective backrest to release it.
4 Fold down the backrest.
WARNING
• Rear-seat passengers should always ensure that the head
restraint is raised and in proper position for the seats to be
occupied.
• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
• Never place heavy objects on the rear window shelf. There is
always a danger of loose objects flying about and causing
injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a
crash.
• Before folding up the backrest, hang the outer safety belts
onto the hook on the respective courtesy handle to prevent
them from becoming trapped.
• Check that the back rest release button (3) is flush with the
surround before entering the rear seat.
3
1
24
IB1849
IB461
Outer safety belt hooked onto courtesy handle
140 Interior equipment and trunk
WARNING
• Place heavy items closest to the backrest and stow smaller
and lighter items on top.
• Secure heavy and bulky items using the four tie down points
provided in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage
flying around if the car should brake suddenly or be involved
in a crash (see page 141).
• Secure small items if the backrest is folded down or the
load-through hatch is open. Small items can also be thrown
around inside the car and cause personal injury.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 258).
• Make sure that the seat cushions and backrests are properly
secured when folding them back to their normal position.
Check that the button (item 3 on page 139) is flush with the
surround before entering the back seat.
The tail pipe of the exhaust system can become very hot during
driving. Bear this in mind when loading and unloading the car so
that children, for example, do not burn themselves.
IB462
141Interior equipment and trunk
Trunk pass-through hatch
A trunk pass-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest
to enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Items should not weigh more than 33 lbs. (15 kg) nor be more than
2 yards (2 metres) in length. See the label on the hatch.
1 Fold down the armrest.
2 Raise the hatch by lifting the handle.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the handbrake. This averts the danger of the car moving off
suddenly if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into
gear.
Tie Downs
Four tie downs for securing the load are fitted inside the trunk. Place
the load as far in as possible.
WARNING
• Anchor the load securely (e.g. using middle safety belt) to
avoid danger of injury resulting from displacement of load on
hard braking.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 258).
IB463
IB464
142 Interior equipment and trunk
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon
Both the narrow and wide sections of the rear seat can be folded
separately. Folding is facilitated if the front seats are not located too
far back. The wide section cannot be folded separately if a cargo net
is mounted on the rear of the backrest.
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position. For
height adjustment refer to page 16.
2 Put the safety belts for the outer seat places in their respective
belt clips, which are located near the backrest (see illustration).
3 Raise the rear seat cushions by pulling the loop located between
the cushion and the backrest. A small pad will open up first. Con-
tinue pulling the loop until the entire rear seat cushion is raised.
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising
the opening handle on the right-hand side.
5 Fold the wide section of the backrest forward in the
corresponding manner.
6 Adjust the front seats for optimal driving/passenger comfort.
Alternative location of the parcel shelf if this is removed:
• Folded up on the floor at the rear of the luggage compartment.
• On edge behind the backrests of the front seats.
NOTICE
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in
their respective belt clips near the backrest to prevent them from
being pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position.
IB1868
IB1212
Safety belt located
in its belt clip
143Interior equipment and trunk
Folding the narrow section of the backrest
The folding is facilitated if the front seat is not too far back.
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position. For
height adjustment refer to page 16.
2 Put the safety belt in the belt clip near the backrest.
3 Raise the rear seat cushion by pulling the loop located at the rear
of the cushion. A small pad will open up first. Continue pulling
the loop until the entire rear seat cushion is raised.
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising
the opening handle.
5 Adjust the front seat for optimal passenger comfort.
WARNING
• Do not travel in the back seat without ensuring that the head
restraint is set at a suitable height for the seats to be occupied.
• Never allow anyone to sit on a folded backrest.
• Always be aware of the risk of pinching when handling moving
parts of the seating.
• Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always
a danger of loose objects flying about and causing injury if the
car should brake suddenly or be involved in a crash.
• Make sure that the backrests are locked when they are folded
back upright. Check that the two red warning-indication flags
are fully down. This indicates that the backrests are locked.
• Check that the safety belt lock is not trapped under the seat
cushions when these are raised back up.
• If the car is equipped with a pull-out cargo net on the rear of the
backrest, take extra care when folding the rear seat so that no
one is injured by the net’s storage cassette on the right-hand
side.
NOTICE
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in
their respective belt clips near the back rest to prevent them being
pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position, see
illustration page 142.
IB1213
144 Interior equipment and trunk
Load anchoring
Driving with the trunk lid/tailgate open, see
page 188.
WARNING
• Put heavy loads as low down and as
far forward as possible in the luggage
compartment, i.e. against the back of
the rear seat.
• Never stack cargo so high that any part
of the cargo lies above the edge of the
backrest, if a cargo guard (accessory)
is not being used.
• Always tie down the cargo so that it
cannot be thrown forward during
heavy braking or in the event of a
crash.
• Unsecured and heavy cargo can
increase the risk of injury during hard
braking, sudden avoidance maneu-
vers and in the event of a crash.
• For the best load anchoring, use the
special cargo bolts and load straps
(accessory).
• Load the cargo bolts evenly. Never
attach more than one strap to each tie
down eye.
• Provide protection on sharp edges to
prevent damage to the load straps.
• Never use the elastic floor net and
elastic side net when the rear seat is
folded down. These nets are only
intended to keep light objects tidy, not
for the anchoring of loads.
• If possible, avoid having the rear seat
folded down when driving with a heavy
load because the anchoring possibili-
ties are restricted when the rear seat is
in this position. That the rear seat is
in the upright position is a basic
requirement for protection against
cargo displacement in the event of
a crash.
• Cargo can intrude into the passenger
compartment during a sudden stop or
front crash if the outer safety belts are
not fastened. Check that the two red
warning-indication flags are fully
down. This shows that the backrests
are locked.
WARNING
• Match the speed and driving style
according to how the car is loaded.
The driving characteristics of the car
can be affected because the center of
gravity is altered when there is a cargo
in the luggage compartment.
• An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg) cor-
responds to a weight of 2200 lbs.
(1000 kg) in a head on crash at
32 mph (50 km/h).
• Adjust the car’s load (passengers and
luggage) so that the gross vehicle
weight or the axle weight is not
exceeded, see page 258.
145Interior equipment and trunk
On the floor of the luggage compartment
there are two longitudinal aluminium rails
(CargoTracks™) where special cargo bolts
can be mounted.
The cargo bolts are mounted by lifting their
locks and inserting them into the rail. Each
cargo bolt is moved in the following way: pull
up its lock and at the same time move it for-
ward or backward to the desired position.
Items for load anchoring:
• Cargo bolts (standard).
• Special load straps (accessory).
Items to keep light objects tidy:
• Elastic floor cargo net.
• Elastic side cargo net for the right-hand
side of the luggage compartment.
The elastic nets may only be used to keep
light objects tidy, not for anchoring.
The floor net should be attached to the
cargo bolts that are mounted on the Car-
goTracks™. Place the tie down eyes as far
forward and as far back as possible on the
CargoTracks™.
The side netting should be attached to the
two tie down eyes which are included in the
accessory kit and to two of the eyes
mounted on the right-hand CargoTrack™
on the floor.
The cargo bolts, load straps and elastic nets
are stored in the two floor lockers on the
right- and left-hand side of the luggage com-
partment. The lockers are opened by lifting
the respective fabric loop.
NOTICE
Do not place any objects so that the
demisting and antenna elements on the
inside of the window could be damaged.
IB1214
Cargo bolts mounted on the longitudinal
rails
IB1216
Example of cargo anchoring
IB1215
Elastic cargo net for lighter objects.
146 Interior equipment and trunk
Cargo net (accessory)
The pull-out cargo net’s storage cassette is
mounted on the rear of the backrest.
1 Remove the covers near the two rear
fixing points in the roof. Carefully bend in
the lower edge of the cover with a screw-
driver.
2 Pull the cargo net out directly back-
wards.
3 Snap the net’s two fasteners into the two
fixing points on the roof.
4 Make sure that the hooks on the net’s
own storage cassette fit against the net
mesh.
The pull-out cargo net can also be used
when the whole rear seat is folded. There
are two front attachment points in the roof
for this purpose.
Removing the cargo net storage cas-
sette
1 Fold down the entire rear seat (see
page 142).
2 Push the cassette to the right.
WARNING
• The cargo in the luggage compart-
ment must be anchored properly,
even if the cargo net is correctly in
position. The only purpose of the net is
to prevent light objects from being
thrown about in the cabin during heavy
braking or in the event of a crash.
• Take extra care when tipping the wide
section of the rear seat forwards if the
car has a pull-out cargo net on the rear
of the backrest. Make sure that no one
is injured by the cargo net’s storage
cassette on the right-hand side where
the backrest is already folded.
IB1217
Cover over the fixing point for the cargo
net
IB1218
Attaching the cargo net to the roof
IB1219
Hooks on the net’s storage cassette
147Interior equipment and trunk
Sliding floor (accessory)
The function of the sliding floor is to facilitate
loading and unloading.
Securing loads, see page 141.
When the car is parked and the floor is
pulled out, it can bear the weight of two
people (maximum 440 lbs./200 kg).
Setting up
1 Lift up the floor.
2 Fold out the support wheels.
3 Set the floor down on the support
wheels.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury take note of the
following:
• Do not leave children unsupervised
when the sliding floor is drawn out.
• Be aware of the risk of pinching when
handling the sliding floor.
• Never drive the car with the sliding
floor pulled out.
• Always use the car’s regular cargo
anchoring when transporting a cargo.
• Provide protection on sharp edges to
prevent damage to the anchoring
straps.
• The sliding floor must not be changed
or modified in any way.
• Put the sliding floor in the folded- down
position when it is not in use.
IB1220
Setting up the sliding floor
148 Interior equipment and trunk
Loading/Unloading
1 Lift the handle and pull out the sliding
floor to the outer locking position. Make
sure that the floor is locked correctly.
2 Put on the cargo, but make sure that it
does not cover the handle.
3 Lift the handle and push in the floor to
the inner locking position. Make sure
that the floor is locked correctly.
4 Tie down the load with Saab’s load
straps according to the instructions, see
page 144.
When the floor is not in use
1 Lift up the floor.
2 Fold down the support wheels.
3 Lay down the sliding floor and make sure
that it is locked in its lower position.
Trunk Release Handle
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from the inside.
NOTICE
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as a an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it.
IB1221
Loading
IB1222
Folding down the sliding floor
IB1833
Trunk Release Handle
149Interior equipment and trunk
Spare wheel and tools
The spare wheel, together with the jack and
jack handle, front towrope attachment eye
and toolkit, are stowed away underneath
the trunk. There is also room for a spare
bulb kit (accessory).
Driving considerations with compact spare
wheel/tire fitted, see page 188.
WARNING
Stow all tools carefully away after use, so
that they cannot get loose and cause
injury in the event of a crash.
IB1753
Stowage of spare wheel and tools under
trunk floor
IB1554
Jack location, between spare wheel and
sill
150 Interior equipment and trunk
Fuel filler door
The fuel filler door is opened by means of a
button on the driver’s door. The door is
spring-loaded, so it opens slightly automat-
ically when released.
Refueling, see page 158.
Opening the fuel filler
door in an emergency
If the fuel filler door fails to open after the
button on the driver’s door has been
pressed, it can be opened manually from
inside the trunk.
9-5 Sedan:
Start by checking fuse 25 (see page 228).
A thin cable on the right-hand side in the
trunk is connected to the catch for the filler
door. To open the door, pull the yellow plas-
tic arrow on the end of the cable.
9-5 Wagon:
Start by checking fuse 25 (see page 228).
On the right-hand side of the luggage com-
partment, in the storage locker, is a thin wire
that is tied to the locking arm of the filler
door. To open the door pull the yellow plas-
tic arrow attached to the end of the wire.
IB1231
To open filler door in an emergency,
9-5 Wagon
IB467
To open fuel filler door in an emergency
9-5 Sedan
IB466
Button for releasing filler door
151Starting and driving
Starting and driving
B
1754
Ignition switch ................. 152
Starting the engine.......... 153
Important considerations
for driving....................... 155
Refueling .......................... 158
Engine Break-In Period ... 161
Gear changing ................. 162
Cruise control .................. 171
Braking ............................. 172
Traction Control System. 175
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) ............... 176
Economical motoring ..... 178
Driving in cold weather... 179
Driving in hot weather .... 181
Towing a trailer................ 181
Driving with a roof rack
load................................. 185
Driving at night................ 186
Driving with a load .......... 187
Driving considerations
with compact spare
wheel/tire fitted.............. 188
Driving with the trunk
lid/tailgate open.............. 188
Driving in deep water....... 188
Towing the car.................. 189
Jump starting ................... 191
Saab Parking Assistance 193
Parking brake ................... 195
Parking.............................. 195
152 Starting and driving
Ignition switch
The combined ignition switch and
gear-lever lock is located in the center con-
sole between the front seats. The ignition
key can only be removed when reverse is
engaged (automatic transmission: selector
in ”P” position).
The key fits all the locks on the car. The key
number is specified on the small plastic
strap that comes with the keys when the car
is delivered. Keep a note of the key number
in a safe place, as you will need to quote it if
ordering a replacement key.
See also page 42.
LOCK position
Engage reverse and turn the key to LOCK.
Automatic transmission: select ”P”.
The gear lever is locked. This is the only position in which the key can be
removed.
The parking lights, hazard warning lights and interior lighting all work.
OFF position
Gear lever no longer locked.
Certain electrical circuits operational
ON position
All electrical circuits working. Do not leave the key in the ON position
when the engine is not running. Turn the key to OFF to switch off the
electrical circuits. In the ON position certain warning and indicator lights
come on as a check, and they normally are extinguished after about
3 seconds.
ST (starter) position
The starter operates when the key is turned to this position. When
released, the key will spring back to the ON position. If the engine fails to
start, the key must first be turned back to the position between OFF and
LOCK before the starter can be operated again.
When the starter motor is running, several electrical circuits are
disconnected to facilitate starting.
L
O
C
K
O
F
F
O
N
S
T
L
O
C
K
O
F
F
O
N
S
T
L
O
C
K
O
F
F
O
N
S
T
L
O
C
K
O
F
F
O
N
S
T
IB1120
153Starting and driving
If the car does not start
If the text ”KEY NOT ACCEPTED” is shown
on the SID, after a failed start attempt, the
cause could be a fault in the transmitter in
the key, or in the receiver in the ignition lock.
The following should be done:
• Turn the key back to the LOCK position.
• Turn the key to ON.
• Press one of the buttons on the remote
control (the LED stops blinking).
• Start the engine.
Try another key. If this works, then the fault
is in the first key.
Contact an authorized Saab dealer for
checking and rectification.
Note:
Certain electronic items, such as cellular
phones, may affect the starting produce-
dure. Be sure that all devices are clear of the
key/ignition switch area.
Starting the engine
NOTICE
Take care not to spill drinks or to drop
crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or
liquid gets into it, the switch may not
operate properly.
WARNING
• Always remove the key before leaving
the car.
• Always apply the parking brake before
removing the ignition key.
WARNING
• When starting the engine:
- Sit down in the driver’s seat.
- Depress the clutch pedal fully. If the
gear lever is not in the neutral posi-
tion, the clutch pedal must be fully
depressed or the car will jump for-
wards or backwards, which may
cause a crash.
- Never start the car from outside the
vehicle, e.g. through a wound down
window. This could lead to serious
personal injury.
• Engage reverse (R) (position P for
automatic transmission) to remove the
ignition key. The key can only be
removed in this gear position.
• Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
the danger of CO – always open the
garage doors before starting the
engine in the garage.
• There is also a danger of CO poison-
ing if the exhaust system is leaking.
154 Starting and driving
It is possible for air to enter the lubricating
system in conjunction with an oil or oil-filter
change, or if the car has been stored for
some time. This air can cause the hydraulic
cam followers to emit a ticking noise, which
can persist for up to 15 minutes after start-
ing. Although this is quite normal and does
not indicate any malfunction, it is advisable
not to exceed 3,000 rpm before the noise
has disappeared.
The hydraulic cam lifters are completely
service free; the valve clearance is set up at
the factory and will not need any subse-
quent adjustment.
Starting the engine
Avoid racing the engine or putting a heavy
load on it before it has warmed up. Drive
away as soon as the oil warning light has
been extinguished to enable the engine to
attain its normal temperature as quickly as
possible.
The engine has an automatic choke and
should be started as follows:
Cars with manual transmission
To start the engine the clutch pedal must
be fully depressed.
1 Depress the clutch pedal fully but do not
touch the accelerator.
2 Start the engine. Let the ignition key
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly – at very
low temperatures, you may need to run
the starter for up to 25 seconds. Wait
20–30 seconds before running the
starter again, to give the battery time to
recover.
Note:
On cars with manual transmission, if the
starter fails to engage when the ignition key
is turned to the start position, make sure the
clutch pedal is full depressed. Misposi-
tioned floor mats or other obstructions
under the clutch pedal may affect starting.
Let the engine idle for about 10 seconds. Do
not open the throttle wide for at least 2–
3 minutes after starting.
Cars with automatic transmission
1 The selector lever must be in the P or N
position.
2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
3 Start the engine. Let the ignition key
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly – at very
low temperatures, you may need to run
the starter for up to 25 seconds. Wait
20–30 seconds before running the
starter again, to give the battery time to
recover.
Let the engine idle for about 10 seconds. Do
not open the throttle wide for at least
2–3 minutes after starting.
Useful tips on cold climate starting
If the engine has failed to start after several
attempts in very cold weather, press and
hold the accelerator down to the floor and
run the starter for 5–10 seconds. This will
prevent the engine being flooded (exces-
sively rich fuel-air mixture).
Now start the engine in the normal way – do
not touch the accelerator.
If the engine stalls immediately after starting
(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
do not touch the accelerator when restarting
the engine.
• The tail pipe of the exhaust system
can become very hot during driving.
Bear this in mind when loading and
unloading the car.
• Do not rest or sleep in the car when
parked with the engine running. There
is a risk of depressing the accelerator
which could lead to engine damage.
155Starting and driving
Limp-home mode
The car’s engine-management system
includes a diagnostic function that checks
numerous internal functions after the
engine has been shut off. If a fault is
detected in the throttle system, the
engine-management system puts the throt-
tle system into the limp-home mode. This
limits idling control, disables the cruise-con-
trol system and limits the capacity of the A/C
compressor.
If the limp-home mode is in operation
(”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
light on, see below) and the outside temper-
ature is close to or below freezing, you may
need to use some throttle on starting (some
pressure on the accelerator).
If the diagnostic system has detected a fault
in the engine-management system, the
”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
light on the main instrument panel will
come on (see page 59), indicating that you
should have the car checked as soon as
possible by an authorized Saab dealer.
Important
considerations for
driving
The engine-management system in the
Saab 9-5 is called Saab Trionic T7. The
system manages the ignition, fuel injection
and turbo boost pressure.
The Trionic T7 system developed by Saab
is an intelligent engine-management
system designed to achieve optimum driv-
ability under differing driving conditions.
The system makes adjustments automati-
cally, for instance, if the car is being driven
at altitude (oxygen-deficient air), for differ-
ent grades of fuel (AON 87–93) and for dif-
ferent load conditions.
1 Starting and driving
• Refrain from using full throttle before
the engine has warmed up (before
needle in mid-range on temperature
gauge).
• A safety function prevents the engine
from revving faster than 6,000 rpm by
limiting the induction air.
2 Stopping the engine
• Do not rev the engine immediately
before switching it off – stop the engine
when it is idling.
3 Regulating the boost pressure
• The system is optimized for fuel with an
octane rating of AON 90. The 2.3 T
(Aero) and 3.0t V6 are optimized for
NOTICE
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light
starts to flash, ease off the accelerator
slightly. If the light does not cease to flash
within 5 seconds, stop the car in a suit-
able place as soon as possible and turn
off the engine. The car must be towed to
an authorized Saab dealer.
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light
flashes, it indicates that the engine is mis-
firing which can result in damage to the
catalytic converter.
156 Starting and driving
AON 93. One of the advantages of the
system is that it enables the engine to
be run safely on lower-grade fuel,
although not lower than AON 87.
• The maximum boost pressure is
adjusted automatically to the knocking
or pinging tendency of the engine.
Occasional, short-lived knocking when
the engine is under a heavy load is per-
fectly normal; the extent will depend on
the grade of fuel in the tank.
• Isolated instances of knocking are
more likely to occur with low-octane
fuel. This controlled form of knocking,
followed by a reduction in the boost
pressure, is a sign that the wastegate is
functioning and is perfectly safe for the
engine.
Important considerations with cata-
lytic converters
The catalytic converter is an emission-con-
trol device incorporated in the car’s exhaust
system. It consists of a metal canister with a
honeycomb insert, the cells of which have
walls coated in a catalytic layer (mixture of
precious metals).
To ensure that the catalytic converter con-
tinues to function properly, and also to avoid
damage to the converter and its associated
components, the following points must be
observed:
• Have the car serviced regularly in accor-
dance with the service program. The fuel
and ignition systems are particularly
important in this context.
• Always be alert to any misfiring of the
engine (not running on all cylinders) and
any loss of power or performance. At the
first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
and take the car to an authorized Saab
dealer as soon as possible.
• If the engine fails to start (in very cold
weather or if the battery is flat), the car can
be push started (manual gearbox only) or
started using jumper cables to a donor
NOTICE
• If the engine sounds strange there is a
fault in the system. Have the car
checked without delay by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
• The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine dam-
age.
WARNING
If the engine is being run with the car on a
rolling road or dynamometer, longer than
for a standard state emission inspection,
to ensure adequate cooling, air must be
blown into the engine compartment and
under the car at a rate equivalent to the
ram-air effect that would be obtained at
the corresponding road speed.
NOTICE
Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded gas-
oline is detrimental to the catalyst and
oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
the function of the catalytic converter.
157Starting and driving
battery. However, as soon as you have
started the engine, it is important that it
runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow
it to idle fo r up to five minutes t o g ive it tim e
to settle and run smoothly. If, after this
time, the engine still fails to run properly,
turn off the engine and get in touch with an
authorized Saab dealer for advice.
• Never park the car on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic con-
verter gets very hot and could therefore
start a fire.
• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.
• If you jump start the car when the engine
is already up to normal temperature, the
engine must start to run on all cylinders.
Stop jump-starting if the engine fails to
start immediately.
Failure to follow these directions could
result in the catalytic converter and associ-
ated components being damaged, and
could represent a breach of the warranty
conditions.
3.0t V6: When starting the engine from cold
an electrical pump is activated. This pump
forces air into the exhaust system so that
the catalytic converter will reach its normal
operating temperature more rapidly. The
pump is active for 30–60 seconds.
Fuel filler flap
The fuel filler flap is opened by means of a
button on the driver’s door. The flap is
spring-loaded, so it opens slightly automat-
ically when released.
NOTICE
If the car runs out of fuel, it is possible for
air to get into the fuel system. If this
happens, the catalytic converter may
overheat and be damaged.
IB1289
2
2
1
3
3
Oxygen-sensor-controlled
injection system
1 Engine control module
2 Oxygen sensor (lambda probe)
3 Catalytic converters
B466
Button for releasing filler flap
158 Starting and driving
Refueling
Only fuel from well-known oil companies
should be used.
All Saab gasoline engines can be driven on
fuel of grade AON 87–93.
For optimum performance we recommend:
•AON 90 for 4-cylinder engines
•AON 93 for 3.0t V6 and 2.3T Aero, (see
page 260).
If fuel containing a mixture of alcohol is
used, the following restrictions apply:
Methanol: max. 5 % by volume.
Ethanol: max. 10 % by volume.
MTBE: max. 15 % by volume.
The fuel filler cap is located in the right rear
quarter panel.
Refuelling:
1 Switch off engine.
2 Open fuel door
3 Insert the fuel-pump nozzle beyond the
flange on the filler pipe. Do not withdraw
the nozzle while fueling is in progress.
4Stop refueling the first time the pump
turns off, indicating the tank is full.
Fuel-tank capacity: 18.5 US gal. (70 liters)
Screw on the filler cap and keep turning until
it has clicked at least three times.
The most effective way to prevent conden-
sation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
possible running problems) is to keep the
tank well filled.
Before the onset of freezing temperatures in
winter, it may be advisable to add gasoline
anti-freeze to the fuel a few times to dispel
any condensation in the system.
WARNING
• Never use fuel for any purpose other
than as engine fuel.
• Fuel is highly flammable and can
cause severe burns. Never use an
exposed flame in the vicinity of gaso-
line. Never smoke when filling the
vehicle up with fuel.
• Do not use the phone when refueling.
Gasoline fuels are highly explosive.
NOTICE
• Do not overfill. Fuel should not come
right up the filler pipe as expansion
room is needed.
• The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine dam-
age.
IB1755
159Starting and driving
Opening the fuel filler door in an emergency,
see page 150.
Recommended fuel:
The engine in your Saab 9-5 is designed to
operate on unleaded gasoline that has an
octane rating of 87 or higher. Octane rating
is determined according to the formula:
where MON is the Motor Octane Number,
and RON is the Research Octane Number.
The average of these two values is the
octane rating of the gasoline as it appears
on the pump at a retail gas station. This
value is sometimes referred to as the
"Anti-Knock Index" (AKI) or the "Average
Octane Number" (AON).
To avoid deposit formation on the fuel injec-
tors which can cause poor driveability, use
only quality gasolines that contain deter-
gents and corrosion inhibitors. Because
gasolines sold at retail gas stations vary in
their composition and quality, you should
switch to a different brand if you begin expe-
riencing driveability and/or hard starting
problems shortly after refueling your car. In
recent years, a variety of fuel additives and
alcohols or oxygenates have been blended
with gasoline. These types of gasolines may
be found in all parts of the United States and
Canada, but particularly in geographic
areas and cities that have high carbon mon-
oxide levels. Saab approves the use of such
"reformulated" gasolines in its products,
which help in reducing pollution from all
motor vehicles, provided that the following
blending percentages are met by such
fuels:
• Up to 10 % ethanol by volume, with corro-
sion inhibitors.
• Up to 15 % MTBE by volume (methyl ter-
tiary butyl ether).
• Up to 5 % methanol by volume, with an
equal amount of a suitable co-solvent and
added corrosion inhibitors.
Other, less common, fuel additives used by
some gasoline dealers are also acceptable,
provided that the resultant gasoline is not
more than 2.7 % oxygen by weight.
Some Canadian and U.S. gasolines contain
an octane enhancing additive called meth-
lycyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). If such fuel is used, your emission
control system performance may deterio-
rate and the malfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for service.
However, these blended gasolines are reg-
ulated and should never exceed these rec-
ommended blend percentages and service
station operators should know if their gaso-
lines contain detergents and oxygenates,
and have been reformulated to reduce vehi-
cle emissions. Nevertheless, if you begin to
notice a problem with the way your car starts
or runs shortly after it has been refueled, try
a different brand of gasoline.
NOTICE
• Fill to maximum filling capacity
• Stop filling after the first time that the
nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.
• Filling capacity can differ between
different fuel stations and outside
temperature. Fuel tank volume when
nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by
0.5 gal. (2 liters).
• Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler
pipe. The gasoline must be allowed
room for expansion especially during
hot weather.
MON + RON
2
160 Starting and driving
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87
octane or higher. Use of gasoline with an
octane rating lower than 87 can result in
severe engine damage. Damage caused by
incorrect fuel being used is not covered
under the terms of the New Car Warranty
and will be the responsibility of the owner. It
is recommended that the gasoline meet
specifications which were developed by the
American Automobile Manufacturers Asso-
ciation (AAMA) and endorsed by the Cana-
dian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Associa-
tion for better vehicle performance and
engine protection. Gasolines meeting the
AAMA specification could provide improved
driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasolines.
NOTICE
Higher concentrations of methanol than
listed above, or the use of methanol-
blended gasoline without suitable
co-solvents and corrosion inhibitors,
can damage your car’s fuel system,
leading to the need for repairs which are
not covered by Saab’s product warranty.
NOTICE
The engine control module (ECM) mon-
itoring the engine parameters also
stores fault codes.
Under certain circumstances, this may
cause constant illumination of the
”Engine malfunction (CHECK
ENGINE)” lamp , thus indicating a
fault that must be checked by your Saab
dealer, see page 59.
NOTE: always observe the following two
measures:
• Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
screwed on correctly before the
engine is started. Screw on the fuel
filler cap until you hear 3 distinct
clicks.
• Avoid driving with the fuel low level
indicator illuminated. The symbol
illuminates when less than approxi-
mately 2 gallons (8 litres) of fuel
remains in the tank.
In Canada, look for the
”Auto Makers’ Choice” label
on the fuel pump.
161Starting and driving
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If
the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s
bad enough, it can damage your engine. If
you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service. But don’t worry if you
hear a little pinging noise when you’re accel-
erating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane
fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, con-
stant knock that means you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emission Standards (indicated on the
underhood emission control label), it is
designed to operate on fuels that meet Cal-
ifornia specifications. If such fuels are not
available in states adopting California emis-
sions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal spec-
ifications, but emission control system per-
formance may be affected. The ”Engine
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)” indicator
on your main instrument panel may turn on
and/or your vehicle may fail a smog-check
test. See ”Engine malfunction (CHECK
ENGINE)” indicator on page 59. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause
of failure. In the event it is determined that
the cause of the condition is the type of fuels
used, repairs may not be covered by your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated
for low emissions may contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcy-
clopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator
whether or not the fuel contains MMT. Saab
Automobile AB does not recommend the
use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be
reduced and your emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunc-
tion indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized Saab dealer for service.
Engine Break-In Period
Pistons, bores and bearings need time to
obtain uniform, wear-resistant surfaces.
If a new engine is driven too hard, this grad-
ual process of bedding-in will not be possi-
ble and the life of the engine will be short-
ened.
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), do
not exceed 5,000 rpm.
In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
throttle, other than for brief instances,
during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).
Wearing in new brake pads
New brake pads take time to bed in, about
90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
under stop-and-go conditions or about
300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
hard braking as much as possible during
this period.
162 Starting and driving
Gear changing
Manual transmission
To start the engine the clutch pedal must
be fully depressed.
The gear positions are marked on the gear
lever. Before reverse (R) can be engaged,
you must lift the ring underneath the
gear-lever knob.
To change gear, fully depress the clutch
pedal and then release it smoothly. It is
inadvisable to drive with your hand resting
on the gear lever, as this can increase the
wear on the transmission.
When changing down from 5th to 4th gear,
ease the gear lever straight back, without
applying any lateral pressure. This will pre-
vent 2nd gear being engaged by mistake,
which can result in overreving and possible
damage to the engine.
Before engaging reverse, wait till the car is
at a standstill, release the accelerator and
fully depress the clutch. From neutral, press
the gear lever firmly to the right before
easing it back into reverse.
Shift-up indicator for improved fuel
economy (U.S. models only)
Cars equipped with a manual transmission
have a "Shift-up" light on the instrument
panel. The light begins to work after the
vehicle is warmed up and provides you with
a good indication when to shift to a higher
gear.
It is not necessary or recommended to
follow the shift-up recommendations in all
driving conditions, for example, when driv-
ing in heavy urban traffic or steep downhill
grades.
However, shifting with the light should result
in improved fuel economy. Therefore, for
reduced fuel consumption and better
energy conservation, you should make a
habit of shifting before or when the shift-up
light comes on.
Towing
Towing of cars with manual transmission,
see page 189.
NOTICE
When the reverse gear is to be engaged
the car must be at a standstill with the
accelerator fully released. Lift the reverse
lock-out collar and push the gear lever
firmly to the right in neutral before easing
it into reverse.
IB471
13
2
5
R
4
163Starting and driving
Automatic transmission
The electronic control module for the auto-
matic transmission receives information on
engine torque and road speed, and also
controls the hydraulic pressure in the trans-
mission to ensure that gear changing is as
smooth as possible.
The position of the selector lever is shown
by the symbols adjacent to the lever and
also by an indicator on the main instrument
panel. If manual mode (M) is selected, the
current gear is also displayed on the main
instrument panel.
The ignition key can only be removed when
the selector lever is in the P position.
When the car is stationary, the engine must
be at idling speed when the selector lever is
moved.
You must have your foot on the brake
pedal to move the lever out of park.
If the accelerator is depressed while the
lever is moved, this will result in abnormal
wear in the transmission.
WARNING
• Make it a habit to keep your foot on the
brake when selecting a drive position,
to prevent the car from creeping for-
ward (or backward if reverse is
selected).
• The car must be at a standstill before
P, R or N is selected. You have to have
your foot on the brake pedal to move
the lever out of P. If the car is still
moving when a drive position is subse-
quently selected, this could cause a
crash or damage the automatic trans-
mission.
• Never park the car with the selector
lever in a drive position, even if the
parking brake is on.
• If you want to leave the car with the
engine running, move the selector
lever to P or N and apply the parking
brake.
NOTICE
After selecting a drive position, pause
briefly to allow the gear to engage (the car
starts to pull a little) before you acceler-
ate.
Selector lever Selector-lever indicator on main instru-
ment panel
164 Starting and driving
The detent button on the selector lever has
to be pressed before the selector can be
moved between certain positions.
Four modes for the automatic transmission
can be selected: Normal, Manual, Sport and
Winter.
The Normal mode, which provides the best
fuel economy, is the default setting when
the engine is started.
Manual mode (Sentronic): see page 167.
When the Sport mode is selected, the
throttle angle is altered to provide more
power at the same throttle setting. The
transmission also changes up later than in
Normal mode to provide higher perfor-
mance. In this mode, the SPORT indicator
will appear on the main instrument panel
(see page 170).
The Winter mode is intended for use when
pulling away and driving on icy roads. In this
mode, the transmission starts in 3rd gear, to
provide better grip, and the WINTER indica-
tor appears on the main instrument panel.
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the auto-
matic transmission will automatically revert
to Normal mode (see page 170).
Adaptive gear-change pattern is a trans-
mission function in the Normal and Sport
modes which matches gear changing to
current driving conditions. The transmission
control module senses the load on the
engine and temperature of the transmis-
sion. A suitable gear change pattern is then
selected automatically to avoid unneces-
sary gear changes and undesired tempera-
ture increases in the transmission.
Lock-up function
The automatic transmission has a lock-up
function, which can render the torque con-
verter inoperative in 3rd, 4th and 5th gears,
thus reducing the engine speed and fuel
consumption.
When the lock-up function comes into oper-
ation, it may give the impression of an over-
drive being engaged.
Kick-down
When the accelerator is pressed down hard,
a change-down to the next gear will be
effected to provide maximum acceleration,
e.g. for overtaking.
Following this, the next higher gear will be
selected at the optimum engine speed for
acceleration or, if you ease off the acceler-
ator, before reaching this.
Detent positions for selector movement
165Starting and driving
Park Brake Shift lock
The transmission has a security function
known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move
the gear selector out of the P position, the
brake pedal must be depressed at the same
time as the gear selector catch (detente) is
pressed in.
Shift Lock override
Check fuse No. 1 (see page 228). If the
problem was cured by changing the fuse or
battery, you do not have to contact a Saab
dealer.
If the fuse blows again as soon as the Shift
Lock feature is activated you should contact
your Saab dealer.
If the fuse is OK, check the battery regarding
the voltage.
1 Apply the parking brake
2 Make sure the key is in position ON
3 Use a small tool such as a screwdriver
and push the lever (see picture) down-
wards so that the detent button can be
pressed approx. 10 mm
4 Move the selector out of position P to N
5 Remove the tool
6 Release the parking brake if the car is to
be moved immediately; otherwise keep
it applied
Automatic transmission,
fault indicator
If ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”
light appears on the main instrument panel,
the system has detected a fault in the auto-
matic transmission or its control module
(see page 61).
This also means that the Limp-home mode
has been selected, to guard against further
damage being done to the transmission. In
this mode, the automatic transmission
starts in 5th gear, and gear changes (if nec-
essary) will have to be made manually.
Stop the car in a safe place. Switch off then
restart the engine. If the fault is intermittent,
the transmission will operate as normal
despite the fault indicator being on. Have
the car checked at an authorized Saab
dealer.
It is not possible to select the SPORT,
WINTER or Sentronic mode when the
Limp-home mode is active.
Gear changes must be made manually.
The following gears will be engaged in the
respective selector positions when the auto-
matic transmission is in Limp-home mode:
NOTICE
Due to electrical problems it may not be
possible to move the selector out of the
park position, even if the ignition is ON. If
for some reason the selector has to be
moved out of the park position (i.e. to tow
the car a short distance) do as described
below.
Position R D M L
Gear Reverse 5th 5th 2nd
166 Starting and driving
Overheated transmission fluid
If the automatic-transmission fluid should
overheat, the following message will appear
on the SID:
”TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING”. In this
event, stop the car in a suitable place,
switch off the engine and open the hood.
Wait for several minutes then turn on the
ignition to check that the message has gone
out. When driving subsequent to the trans-
mission fluid overheating, select position M
and a gear in which the engine speed is
about 3,000 rpm.
Overheating of the automatic-transmission
fluid can occur when the car is towing a
heavy load, such as a camping trailer in hilly
country. High ambient temperatures can
also increase the temperature of the trans-
mission fluid or the oil cooler may be faulty.
Contact an authorized Saab dealer (see
also page 181).
Driving on hilly roads with a heavy
load
The transmission fluid can overheat when
the gearbox is strained, for example, when
driving with a trailer on hilly roads. To avoid
the transmission fluid overheating, always
drive in Normal mode. The adaptive gear
change patterns are then active.
High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler
can also cause the transmission fluid to
overheat. Overheating reduces the service
life of the fluid. Contact an authorized Saab
dealer (see also page 181).
Towing
Towing of cars with automatic transmission,
see page 189.
NOTICE
If the control module has actuated the
Limp-home function for the automatic
transmission, the car will remain in 5th
gear when D is selected, making it very
sluggish. To overcome this, move the
selector lever to position L.
WARNING
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position D or L) to spare the brakes
when you are driving on a long or steep
downhill slope.
Brake failure can result from overheated
brakes!
167Starting and driving
Descending hills
If the speed of the car increases while
descending a steep hill, despite the acceler-
ator being released, the control module will
change down a gear when you brake. If you
desire more powerful engine braking, man-
ually select a lower gear.
Sentronic, manual mode
Move the selector lever to the M position.
Select a higher gear by flicking the
right-hand paddle towards you. Select
a lower gear by flicking the left-hand paddle
towards you.
An example of when you may wish to make
manual gear changes is when overtaking, to
enable you to remain in a low gear for an
extended period of time.
Changes from 3rd to 4th and from 4th to 5th
can be made when the engine speed is
above roughly 2,000 rpm.
If the road surface is slippery, you may wish
to pull off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of
wheel spin.
When descending hills you should select a
low gear to increase the braking effect of the
engine and thus spare the brakes.
Manual gear selections are shown on the
main instrument panel. The selector posi-
tion and the current gear are displayed.
When the selector lever is in the M position,
as opposed to the D position, gas engines
are much more responsive to changes in
accelerator position. The accelerator has a
different feel.
When in manual mode, kick-down operates
for 4th and 5th gears (below 2,000 rpm).
Kick-down cannot be activated in 1st, 2nd or
3rd gears.
For optimum performance, gear changes
should be made before reaching 6,000 rpm.
To avoid damaging the engine and trans-
mission, the transmission will shift up a gear
if the engine is in danger of overrevving. You
may feel a slight jolt before this gear change
is effected.
Paddles on the steering wheel for
changing gear manually
168 Starting and driving
Selector positions
P
To shift out of the P position you must
depress the brake pedal and the ignition
must be ON.
The parking position (P) must only be selected
when the car is at a complete standstill. The
selector lever is locked and the transmission is
mechanically immobilized. Always apply the
parking brake after parking the car.
The engine can be started. The key can be
removed.
R
The reverse (R) position must only be selected
when the car is at a complete standstill. The
detent-release button must be pressed before
the selector lever can be moved to R. Wait until
reverse gear has engaged (car starts to creep)
before touching the accelerator.
N
In the Neutral position (N), the transmission is
disengaged from the engine. The engine can be
started, but first ensure that the parking brake is
on, to prevent the car from moving off unexpect-
edly.
To prevent the engine and transmission from
becoming hotter than necessary, select N for
stops other than brief ones, e.g. if stuck in a traf-
fic jam.
The normal drive position (D) is recommended
for waiting at traffic lights.
D
The Drive position (D) is the position for normal
motoring. Gear changes between 1st and 5th
will take place automatically, the timing of which
is determined by the throttle (accelerator) posi-
tion and the speed of the car.
After moving the selector lever to D, pause to
give the gear time to engage (car starts to pull).
M
Move the selector lever from position D to M to
allow you to change gear manually. Refer to
page 167.
L
Select position L if you wish to drive in 1st gear.
No upchanges will be made if you pull off in posi-
tion L. If you move the selector lever from posi-
tion D or M to L at a high vehicle speed, the
transmission will automatically shift down
through 4th, 3rd and 2nd gears to 1st gear,
depending on the car’s speed. Use this position
for descending steep hills if the car is heavily
loaded to spare the brakes.
169Starting and driving
If you move the selector lever from D to L, downchanges will follow
a set pattern to avoid damaging the engine or transmission.
Manual gear-changing is not recommended on slippery roads.
If one of the drive wheels spins excessively, the engine torque will
be reduced to avoid damaging the transmission.
Adaptive gear-change patterns
Adaptive gear-change patterns are selected automatically depend-
ing on the engine load and the present temperature of the transmis-
sion. The function is available in Normal and Sport modes.
The changes occur at a higher engine speed and the car remains in
the same gear for longer, if the transmission control module senses
that the load has not decreased. These gear-change patterns pre-
vent unnecessary changing up and down, when for example driving
up or down long slopes with a trailer or caravan, and to prevent over-
heating the transmission oil. The adaptive gear-change function is
also selected automatically when the transmission oil becomes too
hot, to protect the transmission itself from damage and to lower the
oil temperature.
The adaptive gear-change pattern function is deselected when:
• Winter mode is selected.
• The engine is switched off.
• The load is reduced so much that the function is no longer
required.
• ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator” appears on main
instrument panel, see page 165.
170 Starting and driving
SPORT and WINTER modes
To select Sport mode, press the ”S” button on
the selector lever when the selector lever is in
position N or D.
In this mode, gear changes will take place at
higher engine speeds than in Normal mode, in
other words, the transmission will change up
later and change down earlier for the same throt-
tle (accelerator) position.
The Sport mode will be deselected if:
• The S button is pressed.
• The selector lever is moved to position P,R, M
or L.
• The engine is switched off.
• The Winter mode is selected.
• ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”
appears on main instrument panel, see page
165.
The Winter mode facilitates pulling away and
driving on icy roads. Third gear is selected auto-
matically for pulling away to reduce wheelspin.
Winter mode can be selected when the engine
is running by pressing the ”W” button on the
selector-lever surround. It cannot be selected
when the selector lever is in position M or L.
Note: It is still possible to use kick-down in the
Winter mode, in which case a change-down to
1st or 2nd will take place.
The Winter mode will be deselected if:
• The W button is pressed.
• The engine is switched off.
• The selector lever is moved to position M or L.
• The automatic-transmission fluid overheats.
• ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”
appears on main instrument panel, see page
165.
171Starting and driving
Cruise control
For safety reasons (brake system func-
tion) the brakes must be applied once,
when the engine has started, before the
cruise control system can be activated.
The system is operated by means of the
controls on the stalk switch:
• ON/OFF (switch on/off).
• RESUME/– (Resume preset speed).
• SET/+ (to set the desired speed).
• CANCEL (Cancel operation of system,
e.g. to reduce speed temporarily).
When the system is ON, the CRUISE indi-
cator light will appear on the main instru-
ment panel and will be extinguished when
the system is switched OFF. If CANCEL is
selected, CRUISE will flash once.
To set the desired speed
Move the switch to ON. Accelerate to the
desired speed (minimum speed: 25 mph
(40 km/h))and press SET/+.
To increase the preset speed
Accelerate to the desired speed and press
SET/+.
You can also increase the speed of the car
using the SET/+ button. Press it once to
increase the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) or
hold it in and release when the desired
speed is reached.
Temporary increase in speed
Press the accelerator to override the preset
speed, e.g. for overtaking.
When you release the accelerator, the
system will revert to the preset speed.
WARNING
• Do not use the Cruise control system
on wet or icy roads, in dense traffic or
on winding roads.
• Set the control to OFF when you do
not want to use the system, to prevent
the system being activated inadvert-
ently.
IB1593
Cruise-control switches
172 Starting and driving
To cancel temporarily
Move the control stalk to CANCEL
(spring-loaded position before OFF posi-
tion). This will disengage the system but the
preset speed will be retained in the system
memory. (The memory is deleted when the
engine is switched off.)
To re-engage the system
To revert to the preset speed, slide the
switch to RESUME/–. This will only operate
when the car’s speed is above 25 mph
(40 km/h).
To reduce the preset speed
The cruise control system will always disen-
gage automatically the moment that either
the brake pedal or the clutch pedal is
depressed.
It is also possible to reduce the speed by
means of the RESUME/– button.
Sliding the button to RESUME/– once will
reduce the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Holding the button in the RESUME/– posi-
tion will effect a gradual reduction in speed
until the button is released.
Disengaging the system
The system will be disengaged:
• When the brake or clutch pedal is
depressed.
• When the switch is moved to CANCEL.
• When the switch is moved to OFF.
• When the engine is switched off.
• When the selector lever is moved to posi-
tion N (cars with automatic transmission).
• When the TCS/ESP system is operative
for more than 1 minute.
Braking
To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,
(e.g. when negotiating long descents with a
drop of several hundred feet), select a low
gear to use the braking effect of the engine.
If the car has automatic transmission, move
the selector lever to position D or L.
When driving fast, you can help to prolong
the life of the brakes by thinking ahead and
braking harder for short periods, rather than
braking more moderately over long
stretches.
Brake pad wear indicators
The outboard brake pads on the front
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.
When the lining is down to 3 mm, the pad
will produce a screeching, squealing or
scraping noise when the brakes are applied.
New pads should be fitted without delay.
Brake pads should only be replaced by
an authorized Saab dealer.
To ensure optimum brake performance,
it is recommended that you use only
Saab original brake pads.
173Starting and driving
ABS brakes ABS (antilock braking system) modulates
the brake pressure to the respective
wheels. Wheel sensors detect if a wheel is
about to lock, and the control module
reduces the pressure to that wheel and then
increases it once more until the tendency is
detected again.
The brake system is equipped with an Elec-
tronic Brake-force Distribution device
(EBD), which distributes the brake pressure
between the front and rear wheels, in such
a way as to achieve optimum braking perfor-
mance irrespective of the car’s speed and
load.
WARNING
• It is prudent to try your brakes from
time to time, especially when driving in
heavy rain, through water collected on
the road, in snow, on a wet road sur-
face or in salty slush. In such condi-
tions, the brakes may take longer than
normal to take effect. To rectify this,
touch the brake pedal periodically to
dry the brakes out.
• The same applies after the car has
been washed or when the weather is
very humid.
• Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.
Before parking, and if the traffic condi-
tions allow, brake quite heavily so that
the brake discs and pads warm up and
dry.
• The brakes are power assisted and it
should be kept in mind that the servo
unit only provides the power assis-
tance when the engine is running.
• The brake pressure required when the
engine is off,(e.g. when the car is
being towed) is roughly four times the
normal pedal force required. The
pedal also feels hard and unrespon-
sive.
WARNING
• The additional safety afforded by the
ABS system is not designed to allow
drivers to drive faster but to make
normal driving safer.
• To stop as quickly as possible, without
loss of directional stability, whether
the road surface is dry, wet or slippery,
press the brake pedal down hard-
without letting up (do not pump the
pedal), declutching simulta-
neously, and steer the car to safety.
174 Starting and driving
The ABS system has a built-in diagnostic
function which will switch on the Anti-lock
brake warning light if a fault is detected in
the system (see page 58).
The ABS system will not reduce the braking
distance on loose gravel or on snow or ice
but, because the wheels cannot lock up,
some steering control is retained.
When the ABS system is working, i.e. mod-
ulation of the brake pressure is in progress,
the brake pedal will pulsate and a ticking
noise will be heard. All this is perfectly nor-
mal.
Press the pedal down hard (you cannot
press too hard) and steer the car to safety.
Do not release the brake pedal before the
car has come to a halt or the danger is
past!
That is critical.
If the road is slippery, the ABS system will
operate even when only light pressure is
applied to the pedal. This means that you
can brake gently to test the condition of the
road and adapt your driving accordingly.
It is well worth practicing the use of ABS
brakes on a skid pad or other suitable facil-
ity.
IB476
Braking with ABS brakes.
When the system is operating, the brake
pedal will pulsate gently and the system
will make a ticking noise.
IB477
Braking with ABS – evasive steering
175Starting and driving
Traction Control System
How the system works
The traction control system (TCS) is
designed to prevent wheelspin. This
enables the car to achieve the best possible
grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,
together with greater stability.
The TCS system uses information from the
ABS system’s wheel sensors to detect
when the front (driving) wheels are rotating
faster then the rear wheels. It then monitors
whether one driving wheel is rotating faster
than the other. If so, the faster wheel is
retarded until both wheels are rotating at the
same speed.
If the two front wheels are rotating at the
same speed but are turning faster than the
rear wheels, the torque from the engine is
reduced to eliminate the difference.
To ensure that the system works as
designed, the dimensions of all four tires
must be the same.
The process continues until all the wheels
are rotating at the same speed.
The advantages of the TCS system become
most apparent when the cohesion between
the front wheels and the road surface is so
low that one or both of the wheels would
lose their grip were the car not equipped
with the TCS, e.g.:
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing with the front wheels on different sur-
faces (e.g. one slippery and one dry). The
TCS then functions like an electronic dif-
ferential lock.
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing on a slippery road, in which case the
TCS eliminates wheelspin. The same
applies when the car is reversing.
• On cornering, if there is a tendency for the
inner front wheel to rotate faster than the
other wheels.
• On overtaking.
TCS OFF
The indicator on the main instrument
panel will come on:
• If a fault has been detected and the
system has therefore been switched off.
• If there is a fault in the ABS system.
• If the system has been switched off man-
ually.
The indicator light will also come on for
4 seconds when the ignition key is turned to
ON, while an internal system check is per-
formed.
TCS indicator
The indicator light will come on for
4 seconds when the ignition key is turned to
ON, while an internal system check is per-
formed.
The light in the tachometer comes on
when the system is operative, i.e. when the
wheels are not rotating at the same speed.
The fact that the TCS system is operative
indicates that the limit for grip has been
exceeded and that the driver must exert
greater care.
WARNING
When driving normally, TCS will help to
improve the stability of the car. This does
not mean that car can be driven faster.
The same care and prudence as normally
applied should be displayed on cornering
and when driving on slippery roads.
176 Starting and driving
Turning the TCS off
The TCS is switched on automatically when
the engine is started.
The system can be switched off manually by
the TCS button, whereupon on the
main instrument panel will come on. The
TCS system cannot be switched off if the car
is travelling faster than 35 mph (60 km/h).
It may be necessary to switch off the system
if the car has become bogged down, for
instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.
If a fault is detected in the ABS system, the
TCS will be switched off automatically.
The cruise-control system will automatically
be disengaged after one second if it is active
when the TCS starts to operate.
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
(option/certain models only)
The Electronic Stability Program employs
both the antilock braking system (ABS) and
the traction control system (TCS). It is a
safety system that helps the driver to stabi-
lize the car in unusual circumstances that
can otherwise be difficult to handle.
How the ESP system works
The Electronic Stability Program can help to
prevent the car from skidding by braking
one or several wheels independently of the
driver. The engine output is then also
reduced to prevent the driving wheels from
spinning. The car has sensors that measure
wheel speed, yaw acceleration, lateral
acceleration, steering wheel position and
braking pressure. The values provided by
these sensors are used to calculate the
actual direction of the car. If this direction
does not agree with that intended by the
driver, calculated from the steering wheel
position, the ESP is engaged.
ESP improves the driver’s chances of
retaining control over the car in critical situ-
ations.
To ensure that the system works as
designed, the dimensions of all four tires
must be the same.
ESP OFF
The light in the rev counter comes on
if:
• A fault has been detected and the system
has therefore been switched off.
• The system has been switched off manu-
ally.
• When the ignition key is turned to the ON
position, the lamp is lit for about four sec-
onds while the system undergoes a
self-test.
IB478
IB1847
177Starting and driving
ESP indicator light
The indicator light in the tachometer
comes on for a short period of time when the
ESP system is operative.
Operation of the ESP indicates reduced
cohesion between the tires and the road,
and that extra care should be taken by the
driver.
Turning ESP off
The system can be turned off manually with
the ESP button, whereupon the light
on the main instrument panel will come on.
The ESP system cannot be switched off if
the car is travelling faster than 35 mph
(60 km/h).
The ESP is always operative during brak-
ing, even if it has been switched off manu-
ally.
WARNING
When driving normally, ESP will help to
improve the stability of the car. This does
not mean that car can be driven faster.
The same care and prudence as normally
applied should be displayed on cornering
and when driving on slippery roads.
NOTICE
Suspension modifications, such as
changing the type of wheels, dampers or
springs, can affect the function of the ESP
system.
Always consult a Saab dealer before
changing any suspension components.
IB1841
Increased stability with ESP.
The system applies the brakes to the
wheels as shown to prevent the car from
skidding
178 Starting and driving
Economical motoring
Factors affecting fuel consumption
Fuel consumption is greatly affected by the
general driving conditions, the way in which
the car is driven and at what speeds, the
weather, the state of the road, the condition
of the car, etc.
Breaking-in
Fuel consumption may be somewhat higher
during the break-in period (the first 3,000–
4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km) than stated.
Weather conditions
Fuel consumption can be as much as 10 %
lower in summer than in winter. The higher
consumption in cold weather is explained by
the longer time it takes for the engine to
reach normal operating temperature, and
for the transmission and wheel bearings to
warm up. Fuel economy is also affected by
the distance driven: short journeys of 3–
5 miles (5–8 km) do not give the engine
enough time to reach normal temperature.
Strong winds can also affect fuel consump-
tion.
How to read the graph above:
If fuel consumption with the engine at
normal temperature is 28 mpg
(10l/100 km), the actual fuel consumption 3
miles (5 km) after the engine has started
from cold will be:
– 23.5 mpg (12l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 68°F (20°C) (increase of 20 %).
– 17.7 mpg (16l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60 %).
– 14 mpg (20l/100 km)) at outside temp. of
–4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100 %).
As can be seen, both the distance travelled
by the car and the outside temperature have
a major impact on fuel consumption after
the engine has started from cold. Thus, if the
car is mainly used for short journeys of
3–5 miles (5–8 km), the fuel consumption
will be 60–80 % higher than normal.
Driving technique
• To obtain the best running economy, not
only regarding fuel consumption but gen-
eral wear also, regular service is required.
• High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
heavy braking and much low gear work all
gives rise to higher fuel consumption.
• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
in cold weather, the use of studded tires
and roof racks, and towing a trailer all
increase fuel consumption.
• Do not run the engine when the car is sta-
tionary.
If idling, it will take much longer before the
engine becomes hot. Engine wear is
greatest during this warming-up phase.
Therefore drive away as soon as possible
after the engine is started and avoid high
revving.
IB311
Percentage increase in fuel consumption
of engine starting from cold compared to
engine at normal temperature.
179Starting and driving
• Driving in a low gear results in higher fuel
consumption than in a high gear because
of the higher engine speed for a given
road speed. Always change up to a higher
gear as soon as traffic conditions allow
and use the highest gear as much as pos-
sible.
• Check the air pressure in the tires once a
month. Incorrect pressures increase tire
wear. It is better to have slightly higher
pressure than lower.
• Check fuel consumption regularly.
Increased consumption can indicate that
something is wrong and that the car
needs to be checked by an authorized
Saab dealer.
Practical trials on the roads have demon-
strated that substantial savings in fuel con-
sumption can be made if the above advice
is heeded.
Road conditions
Wet roads increase fuel consumption, as do
unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
less than the additional amount required to
climb the hill).
Engine block heater (standard
equipment in Canada, accessory in
U.S.)
The following are just some of the benefits
to the car and the environment of using an
engine block heater:
• Lower fuel consumption.
• Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
over short runs.
• Reduced wear on the engine.
• Inside of car warms up faster.
The engine heater is effective at outside
temperatures up to +15–20°C. The warmer
it is outside, the shorter the time the engine
heater needs to be connected. Longer than
1.5 hours is unnecessary.
If the car is equipped with a removable,
electrical cabin heater that is not in use, this
should be stored in the luggage compart-
ment.
Driving in cold weather
Before starting a journey in cold weather
you should check the following:
• That the wiper blades have not become
frozen to the windshield/glass.
• Brush any snow away from the air intake
for the heater system (opening between
hood and windshield).
• It may be advisable to lubricate the
door-lock cylinder (use molybdenum
disulphide, MoS2) to prevent its freezing.
If the lock has frozen, take care not to
break the key (or use the remote control)
– heat it first or spray it with de-icer.
• Periodically during the winter, add gaso-
line anti-freeze to the fuel to dispel any
condensation in the fuel tank which could
freeze and cause problems in the system.
Keep the tank well filled to reduce the risk
of condensation forming.
If the car is parked outside in freezing
weather, fuel additives (gasoline
anti-freeze) will not do any good as it
cannot remove water that has already fro-
zen. Park the car in a warm place so that
any ice that may have built up melts, then
add gasoline anti-freeze when filling up
the tank. Condensation is caused by
changes in the outdoor temperature or by
the car being parked alternately in a
garage and outside.
• It is particularly important when the roads
are slippery that the brakes and tires be in
good condition.
WARNING
Never switch the engine off while driving
as the effect of the brakes and power
steering will be greatly reduced.
180 Starting and driving
• Check the anti-freeze in the engine cool-
ant, see page 206.
The car´s trip computer will warn you when
there is a risk of slippery conditions. For fur-
ther information on this function, see page
66.
The car is equipped with tires designed to
provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
roads, although this has been achieved at
the expense of somewhat reduced grip on
snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
and ice, we therefore recommend that
winter (snow) tires be fitted.
Winter (snow) tires, particularly studded
tires (where use is legally permitted), gener-
ally make driving safer on snow and ice.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of different
types of winter tires and snow chains.
Studded tires are not allowed in some
countries.
If winter tires are fitted, the same type must
be fitted on all wheels. Your Saab dealer will
be pleased to advise you on the best tires for
your car.
Remember that tires age. It may therefore
be necessary to change them before they
reach the legal wear limit, as they gradually
lose their friction properties.
The best response if the car gets into a
front-wheel skid is to freewheel (manual
gearbox only), i.e. disengage the clutch (so
that the wheels are neither driven or
retarded by the engine.
If the car has automatic transmission, ease
up on the accelerator and steer carefully in
the desired direction.
In a rear-wheel skid, steer in the same direc-
tion that the rear of the car is moving.
Tire chains
If you want to fit tire chains (where legally
permitted) they should only be fitted to the
tires recommended under ”Specifications”
(see page 267).
Consult your Saab dealer for details of
approved tire chains.
WARNING
• Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h)
when tire chains are fitted.
• Tire chains can reduce the directional
stability of the car.
• Tire chains must not be used on the
rear wheels.
NOTICE
• Check the links frequently for wear.
• Check that the chains do not contact
the wheel-arch liner at full lock.
• See section ”Specifications”, page
267, for information on allowable
wheel dimensions for the fitting of tire
chains.
181Starting and driving
Driving in hot weather
• Always check the coolant level before
starting a journey. The level should be just
below the MAX mark.
• At the end of a journey, if the engine has
worked hard, allow it to idle for two or
three minutes before switching it off.
If the needle on the temperature gauge
enters the red zone:
1 Bring the car to a standstill but leave the
engine running. Do not remove the cap
on the expansion tank even if the tank is
empty. If the needle on the temperature
gauge continues to rise while the engine
is idling, switch off the engine.
2 Wait until the needle has dropped back
to indicate normal temperature (roughly
midway, in the white zone) before stop-
ping the engine. If the coolant needs top-
ping up, unscrew the cap on expansion
tank carefully.
Top up, as necessary, ideally with a
50/50 mixture of Saab-approved coolant
and water. If only water is available, use
that, but remember to have the coolant
mixture checked as soon as possible.
3 As soon as possible, have the cooling
system checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
Towing a trailer
Trailer hitch attachment
Trailer hitch attachments are available as
accessories. These are designed for a max-
imum trailer weight of 3500 lbs. (1588 kg),
see also page 259.
Use only the electrical trailer hitch socket
provided in the trailer hitch kit.
Saab recommends:
• Use a Saab original hitch kit attachment
which is designed and tested by Saab.
• Consult your Saab dealer regarding the
appropriate hitch kit for your car.
WARNING
• Exercise care when opening the hood
if the engine is overheated. Never
remove the expansion tank cap com-
pletely when the engine is hot.
• The cooling system is pressurized -
hot coolant and vapor can escape.
These can cause injury to your eyes
and burns. Open the cap slowly to
release the pressure before
removing it.
NOTICE
Use only a genuine Saab trailer hitch and
wiring, since other wiring methods can
cause expensive damage to the car’s
body and electrical system.
Consult an authorized Saab dealer for
guidance on how to connect the trailer
hitch electrical system.
182 Starting and driving
Trailer weight
Maximum recommended trailer weights for
different gradients, with a view to comfort
and drivability for manual and automatic
cars, are shown on the drawing.
Make sure you are familiar with the law
regarding speed limits for towing, maxi-
mum trailer weights, trailer-braking
requirements, and also any special
driving-licence provisions
(see also page 259).
The specified trailer weights and gradients
assume that the journey starts at the hill and
therefore apply only to short periods.
Recommendations for driving in hilly
terrain
The following time limits are based on the
capacity of the cooling system in warm
weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (30°C).
The following time limits are based on the
capacity of the cooling system in hot
weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (40°C).
WARNING
• When towing a trailer, do not attempt
to negotiate a hill having a gradient in
excess of 15 %. The weight distribu-
tion over the front wheels of the car will
be insufficient to prevent wheelspin,
making further progress impossible.
• In addition, the parking brake may not
always be able to hold the car and
trailer securely, with the result that the
wheels can start to slide downhill.
• Always apply the trailer’s handbrake
when unhitching it. There is otherwise
a risk of personal injury or damage to
the bumper should the trailer start to
roll.
Gradient
of hill, % Maximum
trailer weight,
lbs. (kg)
Maximum dura-
tion, minutes
6–7 3300 (1500) unlimited
8–9 3300 (1500) 15 max
10–15 1870 (850) 15 max
Gradient
of hill, % Maximum
trailer weight,
lbs. (kg)
Maximum dura-
tion, minutes
6–7 2000 (900) unlimited
8–9 2000 (900) 15 max
10–15 1000 (450) 15 max.
Maximum recommended trailer weights
for different gradients
183Starting and driving
Use Normal mode when driving with a trailer
or trailer on hilly roads. The adaptive gear
change pattern function will prevent the
transmission from overheating.
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
by the temperature gauge in the main instru-
ment panel.
The following can also occur:
• the A/C-compressor can be shut off
• the gear-change pattern is changed
• the CHECK message TRANSMISSION
OVERHEATING can appear on the SID
If TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING
appears on the SID, stop the car as soon as
it is safe to do so, switch off the engine and
open the hood. Wait several minutes and
then turn on the ignition to check that the
message has been extinguished. When
continuing your journey, select manual
mode (M) and a gear in which the engine
speed is about 3,000 rpm (see page 168).
Do not drive continuously with the WINTER
mode selected in hilly country when you are
towing a trailer, as this will increase fuel con-
sumption and risk overheating the transmis-
sion.
Driving considerations
Always take extra care when towing a
trailer, as the car’s handling will be different
and its braking effect reduced. The trailer’s
braking system and suspension also have a
considerable effect on these characteris-
tics, see also ”Driving with a load” page 187.
If the car has automatic transmission, select
position D when ascending steep hills. This
ensures that the adaptive gear change pat-
terns are operational, see page 169. Use
position D or L for steep descents.
WARNING
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position D or L) to spare the brakes
when you are driving on a long or steep
downhill slope.
Brake failure can result from overheated
brakes!
NOTICE
If the ”Automatic transmission, fault indi-
cator” indicator comes on, cease
towing until the problem has been recti-
fied.
184 Starting and driving
Trailer hitch load
The weight distribution on the trailer makes
a lot of difference to the handling properties
of the car and trailer combination. As
regards single-axle trailers, whenever pos-
sible, concentrate the load over the wheels
and keep it as low as possible.
The trailer should be loaded so that the
maximum load on the towbar ball is 5 % to
7 % of the trailer weight with a maximum
permissible tongue weight of 110–165 lbs.
(50–75 kg).
Note that this load must be added to the total
load for the car. If this now exceeds the
specified load capacity, the load in the lug-
gage compartment will have to be reduced
by a corresponding amount.
WARNING
When you connect the trailer be sure to
attach its safety chains to the holes as
illustrated.
IB106
Distribution of load in trailer
a Light
b Moderate
cHeavy
Attach the safety chains to the holes as
illustrated.
185Starting and driving
Driving with a roof rack
load
The maximum permissible roof load is
220 lbs. (100 kg).
Note that the roof load is included in the
car’s maximum permissible load (see page
258).
Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed spe-
cially for the car are available from your
Saab dealer. Always secure the roof load
safely.
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory)
9-5 Sedan
The carrier feet are marked with a top view
of the car and arrow indicating their posi-
tions.
1 Slip the plastic cover onto the adjustable
foot of the carrier (foot with knob for
tightening) to protect the paintwork
during assembly.
2 Open all the doors.
Fold back the rubber strip and find the
fixing holes.
3 Start on the left-hand side of the car.
Rest the carrier carefully across the roof,
with the rigid foot towards you. Hold the
foot clear of the roof to avoid damaging
the paintwork.
Fold back the rubber strip and insert the
pins on the foot into the fixing holes.
Make sure that the rubber strip comes
inside the plastic cover on the carrier.
Repeat the procedure with the other car-
rier.
4 Close the doors on the left-hand side of
the car gently, to hold the carrier feet in
place.
5 Now go around to the other side of the
car and remove the plastic cover from
the carrier’s adjustable foot. Fold back
the rubber strip and insert the pins on
the foot into the fixing holes. Do the
same with the other carrier and close the
doors gently.
6 Tighten each carrier by turning the knob
clockwise (by hand). Tighten just
enough to bring the foot up against the
edges of the fixing holes.
Remove the carriers when not in use, as
they increase fuel consumption.
The instructions that accompany the carri-
ers also include advice on driving with a roof
load – we strongly recommend that you
read them carefully.
WARNING
• A roof load will affect the car’s center
of gravity and aerodynamics. Be
aware of this when cornering and driv-
ing in crosswinds.
• Suit your speed to the prevailing con-
ditions.
• Due to higher aerodynamic drag, fuel
economy may suffer when driving with
a roof rack.
IB480
IB481
186 Starting and driving
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory)
9-5 Wagon
1 Clean the car’s roof rails.
2 Check the markings on the cross mem-
bers to see which is the front and which
is the rear roof carrier.
3 Place the cross members on the roof
rails, on their respective sides of the
center supports. The cross members
must not be placed beyond the front or
rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the dis-
tance between the cross members is at
least 28 inches (700 mm).
If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross
members must be positioned so that the
tailgate can be opened fully without hit-
ting the roof box.
4 Using your thumb, press the bracket so
that it lies snugly against the outside of
the roof rail. Make sure that the roof car-
riers are seated centrally on the rubber
spacers and that these sit correctly on
the roof rail. Pull the spacers down
slightly on the inside of the roof rail.
5 Center the roof carriers so that they pro-
trude equally on both sides.
6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand.
Ensure that the tightening knobs are
upright once the roof carriers have been
tightened.
7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely
in place.
Driving at night
Bear in mind the following points when
driving at night:
• Nighttime driving requires your full con-
centration.
• Do not rush. Count on your journey taking
slightly longer.
• The number of drivers under the influence
of drugs is likely to be greater at night than
during the day.
• Do not stare at the headlights of oncom-
ing vehicles.
• Avoid driving at night if you have poor
eyesight. Night vision deteriorates with
age.
• Keep your car's headlights, windows and
mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,
make sure they are clean.
• Make sure you are well rested before
starting a long journey. Take a break
every other hour.
• Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a
tendency to induce tiredness.
IB1294
IB1295
187Starting and driving
Driving with a load
The driving characteristics of the car are
affected by the way it is loaded.
• Place heavy loads as far forward and as
low as possible in the trunk.
• Secure the load to the tie downs, see
page 141.
• The load should be such that the car´s
total weight or axle weight are not
exceeded, see page 258.
• Heavy loads mean that the car’s center of
gravity is further back. As a result, the car
will sway more during evasive steering.
• Never exceed the permissible load in the
roof box, even if there is room for more.
• Ensure that the tire pressure is correct –
slight overinflation is preferable to under-
inflation.
• The braking distance of a loaded car is
always greater. Keep your distance from
the vehicle in front.
• Roof loads can negatively affect tele-
communication.
Tire pressure, see page 269 and back
cover.
Tires
The tire pressure should match the current
load and speed of the car; see page 268 or
the tire pressure label on
page 269.
The tire pressures given apply to cold tires,
that is tires that are the same temperature
as the outside air temperature.
The tire pressure increases as the tires
become warm (e.g. during highway driving)
with approximately 0.3 bar (4 psi). When
the temperature of the tires changes by 50°
(10°C), the tire pressure will change 0.1 bar
(2 psi).
Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Underinflated tires wear more quickly than
slightly overinflated tires.
If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit
a new one.
Important! Remember to adjust the tire
pressures if you change the load in the car
or intend to drive at substantially lower or
higher speeds than normal.
WARNING
Check the tire pressure at least once a
month and before long journeys. Under-
inflation can result in:
• Punctures
• Separation of the tire and tread
• Damage to the sidewalls
• Damage to the rims on poor roads
• Poor handling characteristics
• Premature tire wear
• Increased fuel consumption.
188 Starting and driving
Driving considerations
with compact spare
wheel/tire fitted
The following should be observed when the
compact spare wheel (T115/70 R16) is
fitted:
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the wheel. Do not
drive further than necessary with the com-
pact spare fitted – the maximum life of the
wheel is only just over 2000 miles
(3,500 km). Have the standard wheel
repaired and refitted as soon as possible.
The car’s ground clearance is reduced with
the compact spare fitted. Note that only one
compact spare wheel may be used at any
time. Take care not to hit the curb and do not
fit snow chains. Leave the wheel cover off,
so that the warning text is readily visible.
Driving with the trunk
lid/tailgate open
Avoid driving with the trunk lid/tailgate partly
or fully open, since exhaust fumes can be
drawn into the cabin.
If you must drive with the trunk lid/tailgate
open, all windows and the sunroof (if fitted)
must be closed and the cabin fan on at its
highest speed setting.
Driving in deep water
WARNING
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) as the
tire can overheat and adversely affect the
handling of the car.
The tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa).
NOTICE
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy
wheel it can be placed outside up in the
spare-wheel well but only while driving to
the closest workshop.
A general rule is that all heavy loads must
be well secured in the luggage compart-
ment, see page 141 and 144.
NOTICE
Do not drive in water deeper than
12 inches (30 cm) and do not drive faster
than at idling speed. Water can otherwise
be sucked into the engine. The engine will
be damaged if water enters the intake
system. The car´s electrical systems may
also be affected.
IB1769
189Starting and driving
Towing the car
Transporting the car
Front towing eye
The front towing eye is stored with the spare
wheel.
The attachment point (tapped hole) for the
towing eye is midway along the engine sub-
frame at the front of the car.
Remove the plastic plug and screw in the
towing eye securely.
To ensure that the towing eye is in far
enough, insert the handle of the wheel
wrench through the eye for additional lever-
age.
WARNING
• Remember that the brake servo does
not operate when the engine is off.
Much greater pressure than normal
will therefore be required to operate
the brake pedal.
• Nor does the steering pump operate
when the engine is off. The steering
will therefore be much heavier than
usual.
• The towing vehicle should always be
heavier than the vehicle on tow.
• Never allow passengers to ride in the
car being towed.
• Always seek professional help if the
car needs to be towed.
NOTICE
If a car with a sport (lowered) chassis is
transported, for example on a flat bed
truck, take extra care not to damage the
spoiler and/or underbody.
WARNING
• Make sure that the towing eye at the
front is screwed in tightly.
• The towing eye is only designed for
use when the car is being towed on the
road. It must not be used to pull the
car out of a ditch, for example.
• Make sure that all bystanders keep a
suitable distance, in case the towing
eye or tow rope should break. The
towing eye or tow rope could catapult
off and cause seriously injury.
NOTICE
• Do not drive the car with the front
towing eye in position. If it catches the
curb, for example, the engine sub-
frame could be damaged.
• Refit the plastic plug in the hole when
the towing eye has been removed, to
keep dirt and moisture out of the
threads.
IB2427
Front towing eye
190 Starting and driving
Rear towing eye
The car has a permanently mounted towing
eye at the back. If the car is equipped with a
trailer hitch, this can be used instead of the
towing eye.
Considerations when towing the car
Gear lever in neutral (in cars with automatic
transmission: selector lever at N (neutral))
Turn on the parking lights.
Drive carefully and do not exceed the
speed limit for vehicles being towed.
Always try to keep the towrope taut by
gently applying the brake, as necessary.
This will avoid the towrope being jerked
violently.
.
The local regulations on towing speeds
must be followed.
The highest permissible towing speed is 30
mph (50 km/h), unless the legal limit is
lower. The longest permissible towing dis-
tance is 30 miles (50 km). If the car has to
be transported farther than that, summon a
tow truck. A flat bed tow truck is the pre-
ferred method to tow.
Failure to follow these guidelines can result
in damage.
Cars with automatic transmission cannot
be bump started. In an emergency, it is pos-
sible to start the engine using jump leads
(see the section, ”Jump starting” on page
191).
NOTICE
•Cars with automatic transmission:
the car must be towed front first.
• If the car is to be towed with the front
wheels off the ground, make sure the
parking brake is off, as this acts on the
rear wheels.
•Never use the towing eyes to pull the
car unstuck.
IB483
Rear towing eye Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
unstuck
191Starting and driving
Jump starting
If your battery has run down, you may want
to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your Saab. Follow the steps
below to do it safely.
To jump start your vehicle:
1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground
system.
2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
jumper cables can reach, but be sure the
vehicles are not touching each other. If
a poor connection on the negative
jumper cable should exist, it is possible
for damage to be caused to electrical
systems/components of either vehicle
should inadvertent contact be made.
You would not be able to start your car
and bad grounding could damage elec-
trical systems.
3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Turn off all lights that are not needed,
and radios. This will avoid sparks and
help save both batteries and it could
save your radio.
4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
Find the positive (+) and negative (–) termi-
nals on the battery.
WARNING
Batteries can cause injury. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
injure you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be
covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your car by pushing or pull-
ing it could damage your vehicle, even if
you have a manual transmission. If you
have an automatic transmission, your
vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
pulling it.
NOTICE
If the other system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged.
WARNING
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
cle. Put an automatic transmission in P
(Park) or a manual transmission in Neu-
tral.
NOTICE
If you leave your radio on, it could be
badly damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
+
–
+
–
IB484
192 Starting and driving
5 Check that the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation. If they
do, you could get a shock and also the
vehicles could be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some basic things you should know.
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
negative (–) will go to a major metal
engine part with a good ground. Do not
connect (+) to (–) or you will get a short
that could injure you or would damage
the battery and maybe other parts as
well.
6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
7 Do not let the other end touch metal.
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
the good battery. Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8 Now connect the black negative (–)
cable to the good battery’s negative ter-
minal.
9 Attach the cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from the discharged bat-
tery, but not near engine parts that
move. To avoid an arc which could det-
onate the hydrogen gas around the bat-
tery, the final connection must be at least
18” from the battery.
10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11 Try to start the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery. If it does not start after
a few tries, it probably needs service.
12 Remove the cables in reverse order to
prevent electrical shorting. Take care
that they do not touch each other or any
other metal.
WARNING
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
WARNING
Using a match or flame of any kind near a
battery can cause battery gas to explode.
You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
The battery installed in your new Saab
has filler caps. Be sure the right amount
of water is there. Add distilled or boiled
water if the level is too low. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not
frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.
When connecting jumper cables to a
frozen battery, gas from the chemical
reaction inside the battery can build up
under the ice and cause an explosion.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden-
tally get it in your eyes or on your skin,
flush the area with water and get medical
help immediately.
WARNING
Do not let the other end touch anything
until the next step. The other end of the
negative cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a major metal part with
a good ground on the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery.
193Starting and driving
Saab Parking
Assistance
(Option)
The parking aid system facilitates parking
and reversing. There are four sensors in
the rear bumper that detect objects up to 6
feet (1.8 metres) behind the car.
The system uses four sensors in the rear
bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that
bounce back to the sensors off any objects
behind the car. The system, however,
cannot always detect small or narrow
objects or objects that do not reflect ultra-
sound back towards the car, such as pipes,
or the corner of a house or rectangular post.
The system is activated automatically when
reverse is engaged or selected. When the
sensors detect an object within the moni-
tored area, the SID will display the text
"PARK ASSIST" and pulses of sound
(-----) will be heard. The frequency of the
pulses increases as the car comes closer to
the object.
When the distance to the object is less
than 12 in. (30 cm), a continuous tone
will be heard.
When an object is approximately 3 feet
(90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses
change character markedly. A distance of
about 3 feet (90 cm) is suitable if you wish
to load or unload the luggage compartment.
If the distance between an object and the
corner sensors does not change for three
seconds, e.g. if you are reversing alongside
a wall, the system will switch to monitoring
straight back. The system indicates if the
distance to the wall decreases again.
WARNING
Responsibility always lies with the driver
when reversing.
• Saab Parking Assistance can facilitate
reversing at low speeds, such as when
reverse parking.
• Bear in mind that small and/or narrow
objects cannot always be detected by
the system.
NOTICE
Reverse slowly so that you have time to
stop the car when the continuous tone is
heard at approx. 12 in. (30 cm).
IB1299
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
the side
IB1300
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
above
194 Starting and driving
The system can be disengaged for when
driving with a trailer. Press and hold the
CLEAR button on the SID when the display
shows "PARK ASSIST", until the display
shows "PARK ASSIST OFF". The system is
re-engaged in the same way. The system is
also always activated when the ignition key
is turned to ON.
Pressing a SID button briefly will not disen-
gage the system, the display will simply
show the previously selected function.
Ice, snow and dirt can affect the sensitivity
of the sensors. In such cases a continuous
tone will sound warning the driver that the
system cannot measure the distance to an
object. You can turn the system off by press-
ing and holding the CLEAR button for
1.5 seconds.
If the text "PARK ASSIST FAILURE" is dis-
played on the SID, have the system
checked by an authorized Saab dealer.
NOTICE
To function well, the sensors must be kept
clean. Ice snow and dirt can affect their
sensitivity.
Do not spray the sensors or closer than
8 in. (20 cm) to the sensors with a pres-
sure washer, as this could damage them.
195Starting and driving
Parking brake
The parking brake is situated between the
front seats and acts on the rear wheels.
When the parking brake is on, the indicator
light on the main instrument panel will be on.
To release the parking brake, lift the lever
slightly, press the release button and
release the lever by pushing down on it.
Parking
WARNING
•Always apply the parking brake when
the car is parked.
•Always apply the parking brake
before removing the ignition key.
• Never use the parking brake when the
car is moving.
WARNING
• Do not leave children or pets unat-
tended in the car. In warm, sunny
weather, the temperature inside the
car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).
• Park where the vehicle will not create
an obstruction or a hazard to other
road users.
• Do not park on dry grass or other com-
bustible material. The catalytic con-
verter gets very hot and could start a
fire.
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift to Reverse for manual transmis-
sion (automatic transmission: move
selector lever to P (Park)), and remove
the ignition key. Lock the car.
NOTICE
Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:
• never leave a mobile phone, computer
or similar object visible in your car.
• clothing, packages and bags attract
thieves.
• do not leave small objects such as
CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.
• if possible, park in a well-lit,
conspicuous parking space.
• thieves strike whenever and wherever
they are given the opportunity.
IB360
196 Starting and driving
Parking on a hill
When parking on a steep hill, turn the front
wheels so that they will be blocked by the
curb if the car should move.
Long-term parking
If the car is not going to be used for some
time, e.g. 3–4 months, the following steps
are recommended:
• Run the engine to normal temperature
before long-term parking.
• Drain the washer-fluid reservoir and
hoses.
• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber
seals on the hood, luggage compartment
lid and doors, and lubricate them with
glycerol (glycerin).
• After washing the car, dry the brake discs
by taking the car out on the road and
applying the brakes a few times.
• Fill the fuel tank with fuel to prevent con-
densation forming in it.
• Top up the coolant and check the anti-
freeze before the onset of winter.
• Park the car in a dry, covered and
well-ventilated building. Leave the park-
ing brake OFF!
• Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.
If frost is likely to occur during the
long-term parking, remove the battery
and store it away from the frost.
• Ideally, the car should be put up on
blocks, with the wheels off the ground. If
this is not possible, inflate the tires to
about 43 psi (300 kPa).
• Leave all the windows open a crack and
cover the car with a fabric tarpaulin – not
one made of plastic.
123
IB485
1Pointing downhill and
against the curb
– Turn the wheels into
the curb and edge the
car forward until the
wheels touch the curb.
2Pointing uphill and
against the curb
– Turn the wheels away
from the curb and edge
the car back until the
wheels touch the curb.
3Pointing uphill or
downhill – no curb
– Turn the wheels
towards the edge of the
road. If the car should
start rolling, it will not run
into the road.
197Car care and technical information
Car care and
technical
information
7
72
Hood ................................. 198
Engine compartment,
4-cyl. engine................... 199
Engine compartment,
6-cyl. (3.0t V6)................. 200
Emission control systems 201
Engine............................... 202
Engine oil ......................... 203
Transmission fluid........... 205
Coolant ............................. 206
Brake and clutch fluid..... 207
Power steering fluid ........ 208
Air filter............................. 208
Battery.............................. 209
Drive belts........................ 211
Wipers and washers ....... 212
Changing bulbs............... 214
Fuses................................ 226
Wheels.............................. 232
Compact spare wheel ..... 236
Flat spotting..................... 241
Air conditioning (ACC) ... 242
Safety belts ...................... 243
Upholstery and trim ........ 243
Textile carpeting.............. 243
Washing the car .............. 244
Waxing and polishing...... 245
Engine compartment ....... 245
Touching up the paint ..... 245
Anti-corrosion treatment. 246
For long trips.................... 248
Recovery and/or recycling
of automotive materials. 248
Headlight aiming.............. 250
198 Car care and technical information
Hood
The hood release handle is located under-
neath the instrument panel. To open the
hood:
1 Pull the release handle.
2 The front of the hood will now spring up,
providing access to the secondary
safety catch.
3 Push the catch upwards, lifting the hood
at the same time. The hood can now be
lifted right up.
To close the hood, release it from a height
of about 8 in (20 cm). Do not press down on
it.
In cold weather, when the mechanism is
stiff, the hood might need to be released
from twice the height to lock properly.
Check that the hood is now closed securely.
WARNING
Never hold your fingers between the hood
and safety catch if lowering but not clos-
ing the hood.
IB487
IB486
Hood release handle Hood secondary safety catch
199Car care and technical information
Engine compartment, 4-cyl. engine
10 9 678
1 2 43
5
IB1773
Engine compartment, 4-cyl. engine
1 Engine-oil dipstick/filler cap
2 Reservoir, brake/clutch fluid
3 Fuse box
4 Expansion tank, coolant
5 Washer-fluid filler cap
6Battery
7 Dipstick, automatic transmission fluid
8 Turbo unit
9 Ignition discharge module
10 Reservoir, power-steering fluid
200 Car care and technical information
Engine compartment, 6-cyl. (3.0t V6)
9
9 21 4 5
7 610 8
3
IB1774
Engine compartment, 6-cyl. (3.0t V6)
1 Engine-oil dipstick
2 Engine-oil filler cap
3 Reservoir, brake/clutch fluid
4 Fuse box
5 Expansion tank, coolant
6 Washer-fluid filler cap
7Battery
8 Dipstick, automatic transmission fluid
9 Ignition discharge module
10 Reservoir, power-steering fluid
201Car care and technical information
Engine families
Saab cars imported into the United States
and Canada meet all applicable emission
control standards. The engine family and
appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-
tified on a label affixed to the left front inner
fender.
These engine families meet applicable EPA
Federal Standards, California State Stan-
dards and Canadian Federal Standards and
are equipped with the following systems:
• Sequential multiport fuel injection system.
• Three way catalytic converter.
• Crankcase emissions control system.
• Evaporative emission control system.
• On-Board diagnostic (OBD II) system.
Emission control
systems
The systems for controlling emissions to the
atmosphere require regular checking and
adjustment at the intervals specified in the
service program.
In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
regulations and thereby helping to keep the
environment clean, a correctly tuned engine
will also give maximum fuel economy.
Saab Trionic engine management
system
The Saab Trionic engine management
system is a unique Saab development that
combines sequential multiport fuel injection,
electronic distributorless ignition and turbo-
charger boost pressure control into one sys-
tem.
The Trionic engine control module (ECM)
monitors many different engine parameters
such as:
• Intake manifold pressure.
• Intake air temperature.
• Crankshaft position.
• Engine coolant temperature.
• Throttle position and
• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
The ECM receives information regarding
engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-
back function in the ignition discharge unit.
By processing all of this information, the Tri-
onic system can control fuel injector open-
ing duration, ignition timing and turbo-
charger boost pressure to provide excellent
engine performance while maintaining low
emissions and fuel consumption.
NOTICE
The Trionic engine management systems
continuously monitors the operation of
these systems and have on-board diag-
nostic capabilities (OBD II).
If the ”Engine malfunction (CHECK
ENGINE)” lamp in the main instru-
ment illuminates, this indicates that the
Trionic ECM has detected a problem. The
car will continue to operate, but perfor-
mance may be diminished. You should
have your car checked by a Saab dealer
as soon as possible.
202 Car care and technical information
ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
Hydrocarbon vapors formed when refueling
will be recovered by the car and not
released into the atmosphere. The hydro-
carbons are absorbed in a evaporative
emission canister. When the engine is sub-
sequently started, the evaporative emission
canister is gradually purged as air is sucked
into it through a shut-off valve. The hydro-
carbon/air mixture passes through the evap
canister purge valve and into the engine
where it is burned.
When refueling, make sure you screw the
filler cap on and keep turning until it has
clicked at least 3 times. Otherwise, it is pos-
sible for the CHECK ENGINE light to illumi-
nate and a ”TIGHTEN FUEL FILLER CAP”
message to appear on SID.
Refueling, see page 158.
Engine
2.3-liter engine
The 2.3-liter model is a transverse, 4-cylin-
der in-line engine with twin overhead cam-
shafts and 4 valves per cylinder.
This engine is equipped with balance shafts
that reduce engine vibration to a minimum.
The balance shafts are chain driven and
rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
They produce forces and torques that are
opposed to those generated by the pistons
and connecting rods, an effect that occurs
twice for each revolution of the engine.
Engine noise is also reduced as the
counter-rotating shafts counteract the vibra-
tion from the moving parts of the engine.
The transmission, located on the right
(viewed from the front), is integrated with
the engine. All models have front-wheel
drive.
3.0t V6 engine
The 3.0-liter engine is a transverse, V6
engine with each bank of cylinders having
double overhead camshafts and 4 valves
per cylinder.
The transmission, located on the right
(viewed from the front), is integrated with
the engine. All models have front-wheel
drive.
IB601
Balance shafts, 4-cyl. engine
203Car care and technical information
Engine oil
Checking the oil level
Check the engine-oil level regularly. This
should be done after the engine has been
run to normal temperature and then allowed
to cool for 2–5 minutes, with the car stand-
ing on level ground. Remove the dipstick
and wipe it clean before checking the level.
4-cylinder engine
The oil level must not be allowed to drop
below the MIN mark on the dipstick, nor
should oil be filled beyond the MAX mark, as
this can lead to excessive oil consumption.
The distance between the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a
volume of approximately 1.05 qts (1 liter).
When necessary, add oil of the recom-
mended grade via the dipstick tube.
3.0t V6 engine
The oil level must not be allowed to drop
below the MIN mark on the dipstick, nor
should oil be filled beyond the MAX mark, as
this can lead to excessive oil consumption.
The distance between the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a
volume of approximately 1.05 qts (1 liter).
When necessary, add oil of the recom-
mended grade via the dipstick tube.
IB491
Engine-oil filler cap and dipstick,
4-cylinder engine
IB1123
Engine-oil dipstick and filler cap, 3.0t V6
204 Car care and technical information
Oil changing
The engine oil must be changed in accor-
dance with the service program, see page
254.
Oil volume and grade, see page 261.
Oil changing should be carried out on a
warm engine.
1 Unscrew the drain plug in the bottom of
the sump and leave the oil to drain into
an oil tray or other suitable receptacle for
at least ten minutes. Take care, as the oil
may be hot.
2 After the oil has been drained, unscrew
and remove the oil filter.
3 Fit a new filter and tighten it by hand.
4 Refit the drain plug with a new washer.
5 Fill with new engine oil.
Run the engine to normal temperature and
check the oil level.
NOTICE
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be
required more frequently (5000-mile
intervals (8,000 km)) if any one of the fol-
lowing conditions apply to the car:
• Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles
(8 to 16 km). This is particularly impor-
tant when outside temperatures are
below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling
(such as frequent stop-and-go driv-
ing).
• Most trips are through dusty areas.
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a
carrier on top of your vehicle.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery ser-
vice, police, taxi or other commercial
applications.
IB493
Drain plug and oil filter, 4-cylinder engine
IB494
Drain plug and oil filter, 3.0t V6
205Car care and technical information
Transmission fluid
Manual transmission
Check and top up the fluid in accordance
with the service program.
If original fluid cannot be obtained for top-
ping up (see page 264), automatic trans-
mission fluid Dexron III (synthetic oil) can be
used. If so, the car should be taken to an
authorized Saab dealer immediately to
have the reason for low fluid level corrected
and original fluid installed.
Automatic transmission
Check the fluid level as follows:
1 Stand the car on level ground and apply
the parking brake. The automatic trans-
mission fluid must be at normal running
temperature, approximately 175°F
(80°C). This can be achieved by driving
the car for about 30 min on the open
road.
2 With the engine idling, move the selector
lever to D and wait for at least
15 seconds. Next, move the selector
lever to R and wait for 15 seconds again.
Finally, move the selector lever to P. Let
the engine idle.
3 Wipe the dipstick clean with a lint-free
cloth and put it back.
4 With the fluid at normal temperature, the
level should be between the MAX and
MIN marks on the dipstick. Top up, as
necessary, with Saab 3309 automatic
transmission fluid (mineral oil-based),
adding it through the dipstick pipe. The
distance between the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a
volume of approximately 0.4 qts
(0.4 liter).
If the outside temperature is below 50°F
(10°C), the fluid will not reach the specified
temperature of 175°F (80°C). In this case,
the correct fluid level may be 0.8 in (20 mm)
below the MAX mark.
WARNING
• Prolonged and repeated exposure of
the skin to engine oil can cause seri-
ous skin disorders.
• Avoid prolonged skin contact when-
ever possible. Wash the affected area
thoroughly with soap and water after
any contact.
• Keep oil out of reach of children.
• Do not touch the turbocharger or
manifold. These get very hot when the
engine has been running.
• Do not spill oil on hot parts of the
engine as this could cause a fire. Used
engine oil is particularly flammable.
• Protect the environment. Do not dis-
pose of oil in the ground or down a
drain. Dispose of all used oil and oil fil-
ters at an appropriate disposal facility.
NOTICE
If there is a smell of burning fluid or the
fluid is black, change the fluid.
IB1923
Dipstick for automatic-transmission fluid
206 Car care and technical information
Coolant
The expansion tank is transparent to facili-
tate checking of the coolant level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant must
not lie over the KALT/COLD mark on the
expansion tank.
If the message ”FILL COOLANT FLUID” is
displayed on the SID, check the level of fluid
in the expansion tank.
Top up, as necessary, with equal parts of
clean water and Saab-approved coolant.
If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
is added, run the engine to normal temper-
ature and top up again, as necessary.
Coolant
The cooling system is charged at the factory
with coolant containing a 50 % concentra-
tion of a combined antifreeze and corrosion
inhibitor. A weaker mixture will result in
reduced anticorrosion protection. For pro-
tection against freezing in very cold
weather, a stronger concentration will be
needed.
A 60 % concentration of antifreeze will pro-
vide protection at temperatures down to
-58 F (–50°C).
The coolant does not normally have to be
changed during the service life of the car.
The type of coolant used has a reddish color
and should not be mixed with other types of
coolant. Saab Original coolant should be
used all year round. Only use coolant
approved by Saab.
Note:
If incorrect coolant is used or added, the
life-time properties will be affected. Even if
the coolant is flushed from the system and
replaced with life-time coolant, life-time
properties are no longer retained and the
coolant must then be drained and replaced
at regular intervals.
WARNING
• Proceed with caution if the radiator is
boiling when you open the hood.
Never remove the expansion-tank
filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
• The cooling system is pressurized –
hot coolant and vapor can escape
when the filler cap is released. These
can cause injury to your eyes and
burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and
let the engine cool before removing
the cap.
• Exercise care when adding coolant.
Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a
fire risk.
NOTICE
Always mix the antifreeze with the
appropriate volume of water before
adding it to the cooling system.
If pure antifreeze is added, the engine
could still freeze and be damaged. This is
because the antifreeze will not mix
properly with the coolant before the
thermostat has opened to allow full
circulation.
IB1338
Coolant expansion tank
207Car care and technical information
Brake and clutch fluid
Checking the fluid level
The combined brake and clutch-fluid reser-
voir is transparent to facilitate checking of
the fluid level.
The level should be between the MAX and
MIN marks. Top up, as necessary, with
DOT 4 fluid. Do
not
use DOT 5 brake fluid.
Use only new brake fluid from a sealed con-
tainer.
Check that there are no leaks in the brake
system.
The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as
the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the
reservoir corresponds to the amount of
brake fluid required with new brake pads. If
the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to
normal brake pad wear, topping up is not
necessary.
Changing of the brake fluid should be
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
The vehicle´s regular braking system is
adjusted automatically, but the parking
brake has to be adjusted manually. This
work, involving adjustment of the parking
brake cables and brake pads, must only be
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
It is not possible to detect, through abnormal
pedal or parking brake-lever travel, whether
brake pads are worn and need replacing. It
is therefore essential that brake pads be
checked regularly, as specified in the ser-
vice program.
Brake pad wear indicators
The outboard brake pads on the front
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.
When the lining is down to 0.11 in (3 mm),
the pad will produce a screeching, squeal-
ing or scraping noise when the brakes are
applied. New pads should be fitted without
delay.
Brake pads should only be changed by
an authorized Saab dealer. To ensure
optimum brake performance, use only
Saab original brake pads.
WARNING
Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes
old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs
water from the air and, in time, could allow
vapor to form in the brake system, thus
reducing its performance. It is therefore
important that brake fluid be changed reg-
ularly, as specified in the service pro-
gram.
NOTICE
Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,
since it can cause the paint to bubble and
lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area
should be flushed with large quantities of
water as quickly as possible.
IB1188
Brake and clutch-fluid reservoir
208 Car care and technical information
Power steering fluid
Check the level of the power steering fluid in
the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
the service program.
The wheels should point forward during the
check.
Clean around the cap before it is
unscrewed. Clean the dipstick. Screw in the
cap completely again before checking the
level.
The oil should lie between the MAX and MIN
marks when the oil temperature is about
70°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder the level can
be lower, and in higher temperatures the
level can be higher, both of which are
acceptable.
Top up with ”Power Steering Fluid
CHF 11S”.
Air filter
WARNING
Do not fill the power steering fluid to
above the MAX mark. Too much fluid can
result in leakage.
Power steering fluid on hot engine com-
ponents constitutes a fire risk.
WARNING
For Service and Repair, parts equivalent
to those used by Saab should be used.
Be aware that some non standard
replacement parts may put you in an
unsafe condition, even if they might fit.
IB501
Power steering fluid reservoir
209Car care and technical information
Battery
The battery is provided with a cover to pro-
tect it from radiated heat. If the battery is
exposed to high temperatures, its life will be
shortened. To remove the cover, release
the two clips along its long sides.
The cover fits the standard battery installed
in the car. If a new battery is to be fitted,
make sure that its dimensions are the same
as the standard one.
The battery is maintenance free and should
be changed if the electrolyte level is too low.
The indicator on the top side of the battery
will be white if the battery needs replacing.
The fluid level and the charge level should
be checked regularly.
If frequent short journeys are made, the bat-
tery may need to be given a booster charge.
This can be done either using a battery
charger or by taking the car for a long run.
A car with a standard equipment specifica-
tion and a fully charged battery can be left
for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient
charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-
ted, such as a car phone, the charge may
only be sufficient for about 15 days.
WARNING
• Work on the battery may entail an
explosion hazard, since the battery
gives off hydrogen which forms an
explosive mixture with the oxygen in
the air.
For this reason, always avoid sparks
or open flames when working near the
battery.
• The battery contains corrosive sulfuric
acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes the skin or clothing, wash the
affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin,
seek medical help. NOTICE
A discharged battery can freeze and frac-
ture. Batteries should therefore always be
stored away from frost.
IB1779
Electrolyte level indicator
IB1780
Battery
210 Car care and technical information
Charging/replacing the battery
Connect the positive lead to the positive (+)
battery terminal (red), and the negative lead
to a good ground point, e.g. the lifting lug at
the front of the engine.
To remove the battery, always disconnect
the negative (black) lead first and reconnect
it last when fitting the new battery.
The battery size must comply with DIN
53735 MFI 230/2.16.
NOTICE
To avert the danger of short-circuiting
between the positive (+) terminal on the
battery and the inlet manifold on the
engine, always disconnect the negative
(–) battery lead first and reconnect it last.
NOTICE
• Never reverse the polarity of the bat-
tery by connecting the leads to the
wrong terminals. The red, positive
lead connects to the positive (+) termi-
nal, and the black, negative lead to the
negative (–) terminal.
• Serious damage can be done to the
car’s electrical system if a battery or
alternator lead is disconnected while
the engine is running.
• The nut on the battery clamp should
be tightened to a torque of 10 Nm.
IB1781
Correct position for battery clamp
211Car care and technical information
Drive belts
The alternator is situated on the right-hand
side of the engine, adjacent to the bulkhead.
It is driven via a Poly-V-belt from the crank-
shaft pulley.
The Poly-V-belt also drives the water pump,
the A/C compressor and the steering servo
pump.
The belt tension is critical and is adjusted
automatically by the belt tensioner.
See also page 57, ”Warning, charging”.
WARNING
• Keep hands and clothing well clear of
drive belts when engine is running.
• Always stop engine before inspecting
drive belts.
• The fan can start even when the
engine is switched off.
NOTICE
Serious damage can be done to the car’s
electrical system if an alternator lead is
disconnected while the engine is running.
IB542
Routing of the Poly-V-belt:
4-cylinder engine
IB543
Routing of the Poly-V-belt:
3.0t V6
212 Car care and technical information
Wipers and washers
Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
If poor wiper performance is experienced,
clean the windshield with a quality glass
cleaner. This is particularly important if the
car has been through an automatic car
wash, as these sometimes leave a wax
coating on the windshield.
If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
fit new blades.
Changing the windshield wiper
blades
Lift the wiper arm off the windshield
1 Depress the catch.
2 Pull the complete blade assembly down
to free it from the wiper arm, and then lift
it off the arm.
Washer jets
The washer jets can be adjusted and, if
necessary, unclogged by means of a pin.
IB506
2
1
IB508
Cleaning/adjusting the washer jets
213Car care and technical information
Use a small screwdriver to adjust the
washer jet on the rear window wiper of the
9-5 Wagon, as illustrated.
Washers
The washer-fluid reservoir holds 6.4 quarts
(6 liters). When "WASHER FLUID LEVEL
LOW" comes up on the SID, the reservoir is
down to about 1 quart (1 liter) of fluid. Add
at least 50 % of washer- fluid to water to pre-
vent freezing and for effective cleaning.
WARNING
Take care not to spill washer fluid
concentrate onto hot surfaces. Washer
fluid concentrate contains flammable
ingredients such as alcohol.
IB1784
Washer-fluid filler cap
IB1783
The headlights have high-pressure
washers
Adjusting the washer jet on the rear
window wiper, 9-5 Wagon
214 Car care and technical information
Changing bulbs
Check that the new bulb is working when finished.
Use only "Long Life" bulbs.
Headlight aiming, see page 250.
Bi-Xenon headlight (certain models only)
Bi-Xenon headlights produce roughly twice as much light as halo-
gen bulbs and have a significantly longer service life.
The lamp units consist of a gas discharge lamp containing xenon.
When the lights are switched on a very high voltage activates the
xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full intensity.
Cars with xenon headlights have automatic levelling. The levelling
system comprises two sensors on the front axle, one on the rear axle
and a control unit under the headlight housing. Headlight alignment
is regulated automatically to prevent dazzling oncoming traffic.
Alignment is also adjusted during braking.
WARNING
Before changing a bulb in the engine bay, switch off the engine to
avoid danger of fingers and hands being injured by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when the engine is switched off.
Bi-Xenon headlights are high voltage and must therefore be
changed at an authorized Saab workshop. Work involving
high-voltage components is potentially lethal.
NOTICE
• Since the headlight lenses are made of plastic, rinse dried-on
dirt with water and allow it time to soften up before cleaning
the lenses. Avoid rubbing the lenses when dry and never use
solvents.
• Use de-icer spray instead of scraping the ice off.
NOTICE
• Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W, since the head-
light reflector and the wiring of the car are not designed for a
higher wattage.
• Switch off the ignition before changing a bulb, to avoid possi-
ble short-circuiting.
• Do not touch the glass of the bulbs with your fingers. The oil
on your skin can shorten the life of the bulb.
215Car care and technical information
Headlight bulb for high beam (Halogen)
On cars equipped with Bi-Xenon lamps the Halogen lamps are used
only for high beam flasher if the daytime running lights are deacti-
vated and the headlight switch is in the off position (otherwise
Bi-Xenon lamp is utilized):
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the lamp unit. To improve
accessibility to the right-hand headlight, hold aside the induction
air hose. To improve accessibility to the left-hand headlight,
remove the battery cover. Release the two clips along the long
sides of the cover.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.
4 Remove the bulb.
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with
the spring clip. Look through the headlight lens to help fit the bulb
correctly.
7 Plug in the connector.
8 Screw on the cover. Make sure that the guide on the cover is
aligned with the recess in the lamp housing.
IB1785
IB1883
Make sure the cover is correctly fitted before locking it in place
216 Car care and technical information
Headlight bulb for low beam (Halogen)
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the lamp unit. To improve
accessibility to the right-hand headlight, hold aside the induction
air hose. To improve accessibility to the left-hand headlight,
remove the battery cover. Release the two clips along the long
sides of the cover.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.
4 Remove the bulb.
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.
Look through the headlight lens to help fit the bulb correctly.
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with
the spring clip.
7 Plug in the connector.
8 Screw on the cover. Make sure that the guide on the cover is
aligned with the recess in the lamp housing.
IB1786
IB1882
Make sure the cover is correctly fitted before locking it in place
IB1910
Contact an
authorized
Saab workshop
if a Bi-Xenon
headlight
requires
replacement
217Car care and technical information
Parking-light bulb (cars with halo-
gen low beam)
The parking-light bulb is adjacent to the bulb
for low beam.
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the
lamp unit.
2 Withdraw the bulb holder.
3 Change the bulb.
Parking-light bulb (cars with
Bi-Xenon low beam)
The parking light bulb is adjacent to the
Bi-Xenon lamp.
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the
lamp unit.
2 Take hold of the lamp leads and pull out
the bulb holder. The lamp leads are rein-
forced to facilitate changing bulbs.
3 Change the bulb. Look through the
headlight lens to help fit the bulb cor-
rectly.
Front fog lights
1 From under the front bumper, grip the
bulb holder and twist counterclockwise.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 Change the bulb.
Refit in the reverse order.
WARNING
• Never crawl under a car that is sup-
ported only by a jack.
• Always use axle stands. Refer to the
information on jacks on page 237.
IB1787
Parking-light bulb (cars with halogen low
beam)
IB1788
Front fog lights
IB1909
Parking-light bulb (cars with Bi-Xenon low
beam)
218 Car care and technical information
Front turn signal bulbs
To change the bulb, the complete lamp unit
has to be removed.
1 Depress the catch, accessed from the
engine bay.
2 Carefully pull out the lamp unit.
3 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting.
Grip the holder and twist it counterclock-
wise.
4 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp
unit.
5 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting.
Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
6 Fit the new bulb and check that it is cor-
rectly seated.
To re-install the lamp unit
1 Align the catch with the recess in the
lamp housing holder.
2 Press the lamp housing towards the
headlight slightly and press the housing
towards the rear of the car.
3 Make sure the locating pin and the two
plastic lugs enter their respective holes.
4 Press the lamp housing until it click into
place.
IB1789
2
1
3
3
Front turn signal bulb
1Catch
2 Bayonet pin
3 Plastic lugs
IB1875
Catch seen from engine bay, left-hand
side
IB1876
Catch seen from engine bay, right-hand
side
IB1790
219Car care and technical information
Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan
The bulbs for the lamps in the rear light clus-
ter are accessed from the luggage compart-
ment.
1 Lower the flap (secured with catches).
2 Squeeze the two plastic lugs and
remove the bulb holder.
3 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
4 Change the bulb.
Trunk lid light and taillights,
9-5 Sedan
Before changing bulbs in the trunk, you
must first release the trim at the foot of the
trunk. This involves removing the handle
and the three trim fasteners (studs).
1 Unscrew the handle on the inside of the
tailgate.
2 Using the peg in the top of the screw-
driver handle, push in the button in the
center of the studs.
3 Remove the studs.
Changing bulbs
1 Squeeze together the silver plastic lug
and the electrical connection and with-
draw the lamp holder.
IB1791
1
2323
5
6
41
4
Rear light clusters
1 Direction indicators
2 Taillights
3 Stop lights and taillights
4 Reversing lights
5 Rear fog light
6 High-mounted brake light
IB516
IB1792
11
232
6
44
52
23
IB1877
220 Car care and technical information
2 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
3 Change the bulb.
Refitting the trim
1 Reset the studs by pushing back the
center buttons so that they protrude by
0.2 inch (5 mm).
2 Insert the studs through the trim and tail-
gate panel. Press the center buttons in,
flush with the collar.
3 Screw the handle back onto the trunk.
High-mounted stop lights, 9-5 Sedan
The bulbs can be accessed after the panel
in the rear headlining has been removed.
1 Remove the panel by carefully pushing
in the two clips, one at the time.
2 Release the bulb holder, which is
retained by a clip at either end.
3 Withdraw the bulb gently straight back.
4 Push in the new bulb.
5 Refit the bulb holder.
6 Replace the panel by carefully pushing
the panel towards the headlining so that
the two clips engage their respective
slot.
Tailgate bulbs, 9-5 Wagon
1 Turn the lock a quarter turn (90°) with a
screwdriver or the ignition key.
2 Open and remove the cover.
3 Take out the bulb holder by twisting it
slightly counterlockwise.
4 Press in the bulb and twist it
counterclockwise.
5 Change the bulb.
6 Check that the new bulb is working.
IB518
32 23
1
IB519
High-mounted stop lights
1 Panel
2 Retaining clips
3 Bulbs
IB1227
221Car care and technical information
Reassembly:
1 Place the two ”hinges” in the recess in
the tailgate.
2 Then push the ”hinges” into the recess
and close the cover.
3 Turn the lock a quarter turn.
Rear lights clusters, 9-5 Wagon
1 Open the tailgate.
2 Remove the cover by turning the two
catches anticlockwise one quarter turn.
3 Remove the two screws securing the
light cluster to the body.
4 Pull the light cluster rearwards and
angle it outwards (it is seated quite
firmly).
5 Release the fastener from the body.
Reinsert the fastener into the groove in
the light cluster. Press in the fastener
until you hear a click.
6 Take out the bulb holder by twisting it
slightly counterclockwise.
7 Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
8 Change the bulb.
9 Check that the new bulb works.
IB1228
IB1881
IB1793
222 Car care and technical information
Reassembly:
1 Align the fastener with the hole in the
body.
2 Press the lamp unit home into the body
until you hear a click.
3 Fit the screws and cover.
Loading lighting, 9-5 Wagon
1 Pull down the glass cover at the outer
edge.
2 Bend one of the contacts so that the bulb
can be removed.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.
License-plate light
1 Undo the two screws and remove the
lamp glass.
2 Withdraw the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
4 Check the seal before fitting the glass.
IB1335
IB520
IB1919
223Car care and technical information
Side direction indicators
1 Slide the lamp fitting forward and pull out
the back.
2 Remove the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, make sure that the spring in the
lamp fitting engages the edge of the open-
ing in the body panel.
Courtesy lights (doors and floor)
and luggage-compartment lighting
1 Insert a screwdriver carefully into the
slot in the end of the lamp fitting. Ease
the fitting off to gain access to the bulb.
2 Bend out one of the contacts and
remove the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.
Dome light, front
1 Ease the leading edge of the glass out
of the overhead panel.
2 Release one of the contacts and remove
the bulb.
3 Fit the new bulb.
IB521
IB522
IB523
224 Car care and technical information
Dome light, rear
1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
ease out the trailing end first, and then
both front edges.
2 Fit the new bulb.
Glove-compartment illumination
1 Insert a small screwdriver in the slot in
the end of the lamp fitting and ease it out
to gain access to the bulb.
2 Bend out one of the contacts and
remove the bulb.
3 Fit the new bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.
Other bulbs
If any other bulbs need changing, you are
advised to take the car to an authorized
Saab dealer.
IB524
IB525
225Car care and technical information
Bulb table
A special kit containing spare bulbs and fuses is available as an
accessory from your Saab dealer. A storage space for this is pro-
vided adjacent to the toolkit and jack, under the panel in the luggage
compartment.
# Cap Wattage
1 H7 55 Headlight
2 H1 55 Fog light
3 P21W 21 Reversing lamp; side reversing
lamp; rear fog lamp; cornering lamp
4 P21/5W 21/5 Stop/tail lamp
5 P21W 21 Direction indicator, front/rear
6 R10W 10 Dome light; courtesy lights; glove
compartment; luggage compartment
7 R5W 5 Safety belt reminder
8 H6W 5 Reading light, overhead panel
9 T4W 4 Reading light, rear
10 WY5W/
W5W 5 Side indicators (yellow);/
High-mounted stop light (9-5 Sedan);
parking lights; license plate illumina-
tion
11 W2W 1,2 Switches; front ashtray
NOTICE
Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage
could damage the wiring harness and electronics.
IB1336
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
226 Car care and technical information
Fuses
The fuses are housed in two fuse panels:
one at the end of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side, and one under the hood.
To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
from the panel (see below). If the filament is
broken, the fuse has blown.
A special tool for removing fuses is provided
at the bottom of the fuse panel. Simply push
the tool onto the fuse, squeeze and remove
the fuse.
WARNING
To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or
fire breaking out in the electrical system,
the following advice should be heeded:
• Always consult an authorized Saab
dealer before modifying or adding any
electrical equipment. Failure to do so
can result in the electrical system
being damaged.
• Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher/lower rating than specified
(see page 228). The color of the fuse
indicates its amperage.
• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
have the electrical system checked by
an authorized Saab dealer.
• If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that
there is a major fault in the electrical
system. Have the car checked by an
authorized Saab dealer.
IB527
Fuse panel in instrument panel
IB1794
Fuse box under the hood
IB144
Sound fuse / Blown fuse
227Car care and technical information
Maxi fuses
The Maxi fuses are housed in the fuse box
under the hood. These fuses can be
checked in the same way as the other fuses.
The Maxi fuses are designed to protect the
car’s electrical system from being dam-
aged. Each Maxi fuse protects a number of
electrical circuits and functions and there-
fore has a higher rating (amperage) than the
standard fuses. No spare Maxi fuses are
supplied with the car.
DICE / TWICE
DICE = Dashboard Integrated Central Elec-
tronics
TWICE = Theft-Warning Central Electronics
DICE and TWICE are electronic control
modules that monitor and control a variety
of functions, including:
DICE controls (among other things):
• Front lights and interior lighting
• Instrument illumination
• Intermittent wiper operation
• Electric heating of rear window and door
mirrors
• Cooling fans
TWICE controls (among other things):
• Central locking.
• Car alarm (Anti-theft system)
• Engine immobilizer
• Autochecking of lights.
• Electric heating of rear seat
• Safety belt reminder
• Electrically adjustable passenger seat
The DICE and TWICE control modules are
linked to a data bus, which is basically an
information carrier that allows information to
be exchanged between all the control mod-
ules and components connected to the bus.
If a fault occurs in any of these components,
diagnostic faults codes are set in the rele-
vant control module, which facilitates fault
diagnosis at the Saab dealer.
The scan tool connector for fault diagnosis
is located under the instrument panel on the
drivers side.
NOTICE
If a Maxi fuse blows, it means that there is
a major fault in the electrical system.
Have the car checked without delay by an
authorized Saab dealer.
IB1795
Maxi fuses under the hood
228 Car care and technical information
Fuse panel in instrument panel
# Amp Function
A 30 Trailer lights
B 10 Automatic transmission
C 7,5 Electric door mirrors; DICE: manual beam length
adjustment
115Brake lights
2 15 Reversing lights
3 10 Parking lights, left
4 10 Parking lights, right
5 7,5 DICE / TWICE
6 30 Electric windows, right; trailer charging
6B 5 Brake lights, trailer
7 10 Engine injectors
8 15 Trunk lighting; trunk lock; door lighting, circulation
pump; parking assistant; SID
9 15 Audio System; CD changer
10 15 Heating, rear seat; sunroof
11 30 Electrically adjusted passenger seat
12 7,5 Automatic transmission
13 20 Audio System, amplifier
14 30 Ignition system, engine
15 20 Fuel pump
16 20 DICE (direction indicators)
16B – –
17 20 Engine-management system; main instrument;
DICE/TWICE
18 40 Door-mirror heating; rear-window heating
19 10 OnStar; Telematics
20 15 ACC; interior lighting; rear fog light; high beam flasher
21 10 Audio System; rear-view mirror; load angle sensor
(cars with xenon); navigation (accessory); Cruise
Control
22 40 Interior fan
23 15 Central locking; navigation (accessory); door mirror
memory
24 40 Air pump (3.0t V6 only)
25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat; fuel-filler flap
26 7,5 Driver seat memory; mirrors memory; sunroof; park-
ing assistant; seatbelt reminder
IB2439
B C 1 2 3 4 5 6
A
14
12
1110
98
713
6B 15 16
23 24
222120
1918
17
16B
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
36
3534
33
32
39
38
37
229Car care and technical information
Relay panel under instrument panel
Relay panel under instrument panel (cont.)
27 10 Engine-management system; SID; main instrument
28 7,5 Airbag
29 7,5 ABS/TCS/ESP
30 7,5 Starter motor
31 7,5 Cruise control; water valve; fog lights, front; rain sen-
sor
32 15 Ventilated front seats
33 7,5 Direction-indicator switch
34 30 Cigarette lighter (front/rear)
35 15 Daytime running light
36 30 Electric windows, left
37 30 Windshield wipers; rain sensor
38 30 Electric heating, front seats
39 20 Limp-home solenoid (automatic transmission);
OnStar; telematics
# Function
A –
B Electric heating of rear seat
C1 –
C2 –
D –
E Main relay (engine management system)
F Fuel filler flap
G Fuel pump
H Ignition switch
I Rear-window / door mirrors heating
J–
KStarter relay
L1 Limp-home function
L2 Bootlid
IB1796
A
BC1 C2
L2
L1
D
G
EF
HI
K
J
230 Car care and technical information
Fuse box under hood
Fuses
Relays
# Amp Function
1 40 Radiator fan, high speed
2 60 ABS/TCS/ESP
3– –
4 7,5 Load angle sensor (cars with xenon headlights)
5 15 Heater
6 10 A/C; car alarm siren
7 15 Bulb test
8––
9––
10 15 High beam headlight, left
11 15 Low beam headlight left
12 15 High beam headlight, right
13 15 Low beam headlight, right
14 30 Radiator fan, high speed
15 15 Fog lights (front spoiler)
16 30 Wiper, rear; headlight washers
17 15 Horn
18 – –
# Function
1 Bulb test; head light; high beam flasher
2 Headlight washer
3 Front fog lights
4 Wiper, rear (9-5 Wagon)
5–
6–
7 Rain sensor
8 Radiator fan, low speed
9 Radiator fan, high speed
10 A/C-compressor
11 Radiator fan, high speed, right fan
4
3
2
IB1797
2
1
14
13
12
7
6
5
1
15 16
8
11
10
9
17 85 1714
11
74 1613
69
10
31512
231Car care and technical information
12 Horn
13 Extra lights (accessory)
14 High beam headlight
15 Low beam headlight
16 –
17 Windshield wipers
IB1798
Location of wallet for spare bulbs and
fuses (accessory)
232 Car care and technical information
Wheels
Alternative wheels and tires
If you wish to fit other tires or wheels than
those supplied with the car, consult your
Saab dealer first as to the possibilities avail-
able.
Wheels/tires combinations that are not
approved by Saab can negatively affect the
car´s directional stability, steering and brak-
ing in both wet and dry conditions.
Do not assume that a wheel/tire combina-
tion will function properly just because it will
bolt on.
The wheels and tires have been carefully
matched to the characteristics of the car and
play a key role in its outstanding roadhold-
ing and handling.
To ensure that the speedometer is as accu-
rate as possible it should be reprogrammed
if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.
Contact an authorized Saab workshop.
Tire pressure
Tires need to be inflated to suit the load car-
ried and the maximum speed the car will be
driven (see the recommended tire pres-
sures page 268). Note that all values apply
to cold tires. For tires with an aspect ratio
less than /60, increase the tire pressure by
3 psi (20 kPa) for rough roads with potholes
to minimize the risk of rim damage.
Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Soft tires will cause faster wear than
over-pressurized tires. They also increase
fuel consumption.
If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit
a new one.
NOTICE
Always consult your Saab dealer before
changing the wheels and tires on your
Saab.
Wide wheels and tyres with sidewalls that
are too low can:
• be damaged in potholes etc.
• cause springs, shock absorbers and
wheel bearings and body mountings
can be overloaded.
• cause that the wheels can come into
contact with chassis and body compo-
nents.
• can affect the function of the Elec-
tronic Stability Program (ESP).
The speed and load limits for the tires
must not be exceeded; see page 233.
Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.
The maximum permissible offset is
49 mm.
WARNING
Check the tire pressure at least once a
month and before long journeys. Under-
inflation can result in:
• Punctures
• Separation of the tire and tread
• Damage to the sidewalls
• Damage to the rims on poor roads
• Poor handling characteristics
• Premature tire wear
• Increased fuel consumption.
233Car care and technical information
Important! Remember to adjust the tire
pressures if you change the load in the car
or intend to cruise at a substantially higher
or lower speed than normal.
Rotating tires
Because the car has front-wheel drive, the
front tires tend to wear faster than the rear
ones. New tires should always be fitted in
pairs, so that tires on the same axle have the
same amount of tread.
The tread should be at least 3 mm deep.
The wheels should be marked, L (left) and
R (right), when changing between summer
and winter (snow) tires. This ensures that
the direction of rotation of the wheels is the
same when they are refitted. Fit the tires in
best condition to the rear wheels.
Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never
standing upright.
Tire markings
An example of the meaning of the different
markings in a tire size is given below for a
tire size of:
205/65 R15 94 V
Winter tires
Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
winter climates where the majority of your
driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
dealer can advise you as to the correct size
tire for your car (if different from the original
size) and also supply Saab approved winter
tires.
Tire quality grading (cars sold in
U.S.)
New tires must be graded and labeled in
accordance with new Federal regulations.
Standard tests are conducted to measure
performance in the areas of traction and
temperature resistance. Refer to the tire
sidewall for the specific quality grades of the
tires provided on your new Saab. Compact
spare tires are exempt.
DOT QUALITY GRADES
• Treadwear
• Traction AA, A, B, C
• Temperature A, B, C
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed-
eral safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
WARNING
When fitting just one new pair of tires,
these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
as these are more critical to the direc-
tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking
or in a skid). The existing rear wheels
should therefore be moved to the front.
Always move left rear to left front and right
rear to right front, so that the direction of
rotation remains the same.
205 Tire section width, mm
65 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height
is 65 % of the section width
R Radial ply
15 Wheel rim diameter 15 in at bead
seats
94 Tire load code
V Speed marking
Tyre load index
91 max 1366 lbs (615 kg)
93 max 1433 lbs (650 kg)
94 max 1477 lbs (670 kg)
Speed ratings
S up to 100 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 167 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
234 Car care and technical information
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (US)
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-
der and maximum section width. For exam-
ple:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road character-
istics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B and C. These grades represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance. Wear indicators
The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
form of smooth, treadless strips across the
width, which become visible when only
1.6 mm of tread remains. As soon as the
indicators become visible, new tires should
be fitted without delay.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
limit for minimum tread depth in your
country and also any regulations gov-
erning the use of winter tires.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to a tire is
based on straight-ahead braking, traction
test and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
SG840
Wear indicators
235Car care and technical information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to dis-
sipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temper-
ature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Date code
Tires should be regarded as perishable
goods. As the tires age, the rubber becomes
progressively harder, and the roadholding
ability of the tires diminishes. This is partic-
ularly true on winter tires.
Tires now have a date-code marking for the
year of manufacture. The first two digits
denote the week number and the two last
digits the year. The ”<” symbol points to the
year.
Accordingly, a date code of 0200 signifies
that the tire was manufactured in week 02,
2000.
WARNING
The temperature grade for a tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
IB1564
Date code
236 Car care and technical information
Compact spare wheel
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the tire. Its use is
only permitted when a standard tire has sus-
tained a puncture. The maximum life of the
tire is only 2000 miles (3,500 km).
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
compact spare fitted.
The compact spare should be inflated to
60 psi (420 kPa). Carry the punctured tire in
the spare-wheel well under the luggage-
compartment floor.
Have the standard tire repaired and refitted
as soon as possible (see also page 188).
The spare wheel, together with the jack,
front towrope attachment eye and toolkit, is
stowed away underneath a panel in the lug-
gage-compartment floor. The jack handle is
kept in a cover beside the spare wheel.
If you need to change a wheel, remove the
tool kit first and then the spare wheel.
The panel over the spare wheel can be held
open by hooking the handle onto the rubber
seal.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy
wheel it can be placed outside up in the
spare-wheel well but only while driving to
the closest workshop.
A general rule is that all heavy loads must
be well secured in the luggage compart-
ment, see page 141 and 144.
IB534
Panel hooked back, 9-5 Sedan
IB1232
Hanging up the cover and spare wheel
compartments mats, 9-5 Wagon
IB1186
Spare wheel (under panel in luggage
compartment)
237Car care and technical information
Changing a wheel
WARNING
• The car jack is designed solely for use
in changing a wheel or fitting snow
chains. It must not be used to sup-
port the car during repair work or
servicing.
•Never crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack.
• Special care must be taken if the car is
on a slope – use wheel chocks!
• Position chocks, one ahead and one
behind, the wheel that is diagonally
opposite to the one to be changed.
• Switch on the hazard warning lights if
the car is on a road.
• Apply the parking brake and leave the
car in gear (1st or reverse). Automatic
transmission: move selector to the
P position.
• Ensure that everybody is out of the car
before jacking it up.
• Never start the engine while the car is
jacked up.
• The jack must stand on a firm, level
surface.
• Stow the jack in the place provided for
it under the panel in the floor of the
trunk. Secure it properly to avoid injury
to passengers in the event of a crash.
• Do not use the jack for any purpose
other than for jacking up the car.
• Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
threads of the wheel bolts if the car has
been driven for several years exclu-
sively with alloy wheels.
If steel wheels are now fitted, the bolt
hole threads in the brake hubs should
be cleaned before the thinner steel
wheels are fitted. It may otherwise not
be possible to achieve the required
clamping force despite tightening the
bolts to the correct torque.
238 Car care and technical information
Position for jack
IB1838
IB1553
Positioning the jack
The collapsible jack handle is stowed in a cloth bag by the spare wheel. With the help of
your foot, extend the handle as illustrated
IB1554
Jack location, between spare wheel and
sill
IB1704
239Car care and technical information
To jack up the car, apply the jack to one of
the special jacking points under the sills.
If a floor jack is used, it can be applied to the
standard jacking points used by the dealer.
A floor jack can lift both front wheels or both
rear wheels off the ground simultaneously.
A jack stand must then be applied under-
neath the front of the engine subframe (at
the fixing point for the towrope-attachment
eye) or to the rear towrope-attachment eye
(or under the trailer hitch, if fitted).
NOTICE
Apply the jack only to the jacking points
indicated on the body.
IB1130
Jacking points for a trolley jack
240 Car care and technical information
1 Put the car in 1st gear (automatic trans-
mission: move selector to the P position)
and apply the parking brake.
2 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
before placing it under the recess in the
sill.
Make sure that the jack fully engages
the recess in the sill and that the base of
the jack is steady and flat on the ground.
3 Remove the wheel cover (where appli-
cable).
Loosen the wheel bolts by half a turn.
4 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of
the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and
lift off the wheel.
5 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact
surfaces between the wheel and brake
disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the
hub.
6 Fit the wheel and screw in the bolts in the
sequence shown (opposite pairs).
Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts
and wheel to be seated correctly.
7 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
bolts to the correct torque in the
sequence shown (opposite pairs).
Tightening torque
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Do not overtighten the bolts using an
impact wrench: not only can this
damage the wheels but it can also make
it impossible to undo the bolts using the
wheel wrench in the car’s toolkit.
8 Check-tighten the wheel bolts after a
few miles.
Tightening torque
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
NOTICE
• When refitting wheel covers (where
applicable), make sure that the valve
protrudes through the marked hole in
the wheel cover.
• Do not overtighten the bolts using an
impact wrench: not only can this
damage the wheels but it can also
make it impossible to undo the bolts
using the wheel wrench in the car’s
toolkit.
Clean any rust or dirt from the contact sur-
faces between the wheel and brake disc.
IB2428
Do not wipe away the grease in the hub.
241Car care and technical information
Flat spotting
All tires get hot, especially on long journeys
or when the car is driven hard. After the car
has been parked with hot tires and the tires
have cooled down, a flat spot can appear in
the tire, where it is in contact with the
ground. The same can occur if the car has
not been moved for a long time.
Flat spots can give rise to vibration that can
be felt through the steering wheel, similar to
that experienced when the wheels need bal-
ancing. Flat spots of this type disappear
once the tires get hot again, usually after
10–15 miles (20–25 km) of driving at cruis-
ing speed.
WARNING
Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
threads if the car has been driven for sev-
eral years exclusively with alloy wheels.
If steel wheels are now fitted, the bolt hole
threads in the brake hubs should be
cleaned before the thinner steel wheels
are fitted. It may otherwise not be possi-
ble to achieve the required clamping force
despite tightening the bolts to the correct
torque.
IB539
Tightening sequence, wheel bolts
IB1800
IB1800
Removing the wheel cover
242 Car care and technical information
Air conditioning
(ACC)
Fault diagnosis
If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
a number of checks you can perform your-
self. If the fault persists, however, have the
system checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
Important!
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-
densation is drained off through two outlets
underneath the floor of the car in the vicinity
of the front doors. It is therefore perfectly
normal for water to be seen dripping from
these outlets when the car is parked. The
warmer the ambient air and the higher the
humidity, the greater will be the amount of
condensation formed.
Inadequate cooling:
a Check that the condenser (forward of
the radiator) has not become clogged
with dirt and insects.
b Make sure that the drive belt for the com-
pressor is not slipping.
c Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
and compressor.
Maintenance
• The drive belt for the compressor should
be inspected under the regular service
program.
• Clean dirt and insects away from the con-
denser and radiator to prevent clogging.
When washing the car, use the hose to
spray the radiator and condenser (located
forward of the radiator) from both sides
(both from the front of the car and from
inside the engine bay). Do not use a pres-
sure washer.
Caution: Do not use the hose when the
engine is hot.
Other than in extremely cold weather, do not
screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this
will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
Note:
The A/C system will only operate
when the outdoor temperature is above the
freezing point (0°C, 32°F).
WARNING
• All repairs and adjustments on the A/C
system must be carried out by a Saab
dealer authorized for this kind of work.
• The A/C system is pressurized. Do not
break any connections or undo A/C
system components.
• Escaping refrigerant gas can cause
visual impairment or other injury.
NOTICE
• The A/C system is designed for use
with R134a refrigerant.
• Refrigerant handling requires special
equipment and special procedures for
charging and draining the system.
• Never mix R134a and R12 refriger-
ants.
243Car care and technical information
Safety belts
Regularly check the function of the safety
belts as follows:
• Hold the diagonal strap and pull it sharply.
The safety belt should
lock
and it should
not be possible to withdraw it further.
Check the anchorage points in the floor.
They must not have suffered rust damage.
There must be no frayed threads in the web-
bing.
Safety belts must not come into contact with
substances such as polishes, oils or other
chemicals. If the straps are dirty, wash them
with warm water and a detergent or have
them replaced.
Upholstery and trim
To remove fluff or hairs from the seat uphol-
stery or headlining, use a moist, lint-free
cloth or a special lint remover (brush or
roller). Remove any dirty marks using a
cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy
water.
When using a stain remover, always work
from the outside towards the center to avoid
leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
remain, it can usually be removed using
lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
Wet patches left by spilt soft drinks or thin oil
must be wiped off immediately using an
absorbent material, such as kitchen paper,
and treated with stain remover.
Alcohol is recommended for removing
grease or oil stains, and a semi-stiff brush
may also be used.
Cleaning and caring for leather
upholstery
The principal reason for treating leather
upholstery is to maintain its elegant appear-
ance and to provide it with a protective film.
Discoloration caused by dust and wear
mainly affects the lighter shades, although
this is not detrimental to the leather –
indeed, the patina resulting from use is often
considered desirable in leather. But if the
leather is allowed to become too grubby, it
can start to look shabby.
It is a good idea to clean and recondition the
leather twice a year – in conjunction with a
general spring-cleaning of the car – after the
winter and in the autumn, for instance. In
hot, dry climates, the leather will need to be
treated more frequently. Recommended
conditioner – Saab Leather Care Lotion.
Do not use unknown harsh polishing
agents, cleaning agents, sprays, coarse
soap or hot water.
Textile carpeting
Vacuum clean the carpeting regularly. Car-
pets can also be cleaned using a brush, or
carpet shampoo applied with a sponge. Do
not use vacuum cleaners outdoors unless
they are properly grounded.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other com-
ponents must be inspected by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself but visit an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
244 Car care and technical information
Washing the car
The bodywork must be washed frequently.
When the car is new, the body should be
washed by hand using plain cold water and
a clean, soft brush, or in a brushless car-
wash that uses mild detergent. Automatic
car washes with brushes should be avoided
when the car is new. Do not use automatic
car washes for the first five or six months,
before the paintwork has hardened prop-
erly. Thereafter, use a high quality car wash
soap added to lukewarm water.
Do not use a pressure washer at close
range on stone chip damage, scratches or
other damage to the paintwork. The paint
can otherwise start to flake.
Remove any bird droppings without delay,
as these can discolor the paintwork and
prove difficult to polish out.
Use a soft cloth moistened with methyl alco-
hol to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do
not use strong cleaners, as these can dry
out the paintwork.
The underside of the car also needs wash-
ing regularly, and this should be done extra
thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the
underside of the car by hand if the car is usu-
ally washed in an automatic car wash with-
out special facilities for underbody cleaning.
Never wash or leave the car to dry in the
sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather
immediately after washing to avoid smears
and streaks.
Clean the window glass inside and out using
a high quality window cleaner. This is partic-
ularly important when the car is new, as
upholstery and trim have a tendency to
sweat a little at first.
Keep the glass well cleaned, as this helps to
prevent misting.
NOTICE
Avoid using any alcohol-based cleaners
on the front and rear light clusters, as
these can cause cracking of the lenses.
NOTICE
• The door mirrors must be fully
retracted before the car enters an
automatic car wash.
• Remove fixed antennas, e.g. for
mobile phone, before putting car
through an automatic car wash.
• Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.
Wet brake discs may reduce the per-
formance of the brakes.
• Cars with Saab Parking Assistance:
Do not spray the sensors or closer
than 20 cm to the sensors with a pres-
sure washer, as this can damage
them.
245Car care and technical information
Waxing and polishing
Do not wax a new car during the first three
or four months. In fact, there is no need to
polish the car before the paintwork has
started to go dull through oxidation. Other
than in exceptional cases, do not use abra-
sive polishes containing a cutting agent on
a new car. Always wash the car thoroughly
before waxing or polishing.
Engine compartment
Clean the engine compartment using an
engine detergent and rinse with hot water.
Cover the headlights. Do not use high-pres-
sure washer. Avoid spraying the hood liner,
as this can become heavy and hang down
and touch the engine when the hood is
closed.
Do not use gasoline as a cleaning agent or
solvent when carrying out repairs or mainte-
nance. Saab recommends the use of envi-
ronmentally safe degreasing agents.
Touching up the paint
Damaged paintwork should be treated as
soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,
the greater the risk of corrosion. The
anti-perforation warranty does not cover
corrosion resulting from untreated defects.
Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is
usually extensive and can only be properly
restored by professionals.
However, you can repair small scratches
and stone-chip damage yourself. The nec-
essary tools and materials, such as primer,
touch-up paint and brushes, are available
from your Saab dealer.
In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
where the metal has not been exposed and
an undamaged layer of paint remains,
touch-up paint can usually be applied
directly, after any dirt has been scraped
away using a pointed knife.
If corrosion has already set in, e.g. as a
result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possi-
ble, the damaged area should be taken
back to the bare metal. The metal should
then be primed with two thin coats of primer
applied by brush.
After the primer has dried, apply several thin
layers of topcoat enamel until the surface of
the repaired area is flush with the surround-
ing paintwork.
Stir both primer and touch-up enamel thor-
oughly before use and allow each coat to
dry before applying the next.
246 Car care and technical information
Two-coat enamel
As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
applied in two operations. The first coat, the
base color, contains the pigment, metal
flakes and binder. The second coat consists
of a clear enamel, which provides the final
gloss for the paintwork and protects the
base from moisture and environmental con-
taminants.
Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
2 Apply the primer, base color and finally,
the enamel. To achieve the best finish,
apply two or three coats of primer.
Anti-corrosion
treatment
The entire car is corrosion-protected at the
factory in different stages by an electrolytic
immersion coating and a polyester-based
protective coating to protect against corro-
sion caused by stones flung up by the
wheels. A thin penetrating anti-rust oil is
also applied in cavities and body members.
In addition to conventional anti-corrosion
treatment like painting, underbody treat-
ment and cavity treatment, most of the body
panel surfaces are galvanized. These
include the hood, the doors and the under-
body.
The anti-corrosion treatment on the under-
side of the car and inside the wheel arches
is particularly exposed to constant wear and
possible damage, the degree of which will
obviously depend on driving conditions.
IB1334
Surface-treatment composition
1 Body panel
2 Zinc (certain panel sections only) 7.5 µm
3 Phosphate coating
4 Cathodic ED 28 µm
5 Intermediate coat 35 µm
6 Metallic base 15 µm
7 Clear enamel /solid enamel 40 µm
247Car care and technical information
What causes rust?
Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-
ject to rusting whenever air and moisture
manage to penetrate the protective finish,
and body panels may rust through if the pro-
cess is unchecked. Rusting can occur wher-
ever water is trapped or where the car’s
panels are continuously damp. Damage to
paint and undercoating by stones, gravel
and minor crashes immediately exposes
metal to air and moisture. Road salts used
for de-icing will collect on the bottom of the
car and promote rusting. Areas of the coun-
try with high humidity have great potential
for rust problems, especially where salt is
used on roads or there is moist sea air.
Industrial pollution (fallout) may also
damage paint and promote rusting.
Preventive maintenance
The following procedures are necessary to
help protect against rusting. Refer also to
the terms and conditions of the Sheet Metal
Coverage described in the warranty book-
let.
1
Wash the car frequently, and wax at
least twice a year.
Under adverse con-
ditions, where there is a rapid buildup of
dirt, sand or road salt, wash your car at
least once a week. After extreme expo-
sure to salted snow or slush, evidenced
by a white film on the car, wash the car
immediately. Frequent washing will pre-
vent paint damage from acid rain and
other airborne contaminants such as
tree sap and bird droppings. If any of
these contaminants are noticed on the
car the finish should be washed immedi-
ately.
• Begin washing by rinsing the entire car
with water to loosen and flush off heavy
concentrations of dirt (include the
underbody).
• Sponge the car with a solution of either
a good quality car soap or mild general
purpose (dish washing) detergent and
water.
• Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
• After washing, check and clear all
drains in doors and body panels.
• Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
chamois.
2
Clean the underside of the car during
the winter.
Use high pressure water to
clean the car’s underside (floor panels,
wheel wells) at least at mid- winter and
in the spring.
3
Inspect the car frequently for leaks or
damage, and arrange for needed
repairs promptly.
After washing or after
heavy rain, check for leaks. When wash-
ing the car inspect body surfaces for
paint damage. While checking for leaks,
lift the floor mats and check beneath
them. Water can collect in these areas
and remain for prolonged periods. Dry
any wet areas including the floor mats.
Have leaks repaired as soon as possi-
ble.
Use touch-up paint to repair small
scratches or minor finish damage. Areas
where metal is exposed will rust quickly
and MUST be repaired immediately by
touch-up or professional repainting.
Rust must be removed, the bare metal
primed and painted. Major body
damage should be repaired immediately
and new panels or exposed areas
should be undercoated with anti- corro-
sion material.
Repairs of this type are the owner’s
responsibility and are not covered under
warranty.
248 Car care and technical information
4
Inspect the undercoating and touch
up if necessary.
Pay particular atten-
tion to the fenders and wheel housings,
which are exposed to abrasion by flying
gravel, etc. If the composition has worn
or flaked off, the steel must be thor-
oughly cleaned and dried before a fresh
coat is applied. The cleaning is best
done with a scraper and a steel wire
brush, followed by washing with solvent.
Apply the new coating thinly, as other-
wise it may run off or fall off when dry.
For long trips
Before setting off on a long journey, it is
advisable to have your car checked over by
your Saab dealer.
Obtain a few important items to take along
on your journey such as spare bulbs, wiper
blades, fuses, a Poly-V-belt and the like.
You can check some points yourself before-
hand:
• Make sure that the engine is in good con-
dition.
• Check that no oil or gasoline leaks out of
the engine or gearbox/transmission.
• Check the coolant and power steering
fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
• Inspect the Poly-V-belt and replace it if it
shows any signs of hard wear.
• Check the battery charge.
• Check the tires for tread pattern and air
pressure, including the compact spare
wheel.
• Check the brakes.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check for the presence of the tool kit and
the jack in the car.
Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials
A typical car consists of metals (65–75 %),
plastics (10–15 %), rubber (5 %) and small
quantities of glass, wood, paper and tex-
tiles. The recycling of metals has been com-
monplace for a long time now.
To facilitate sorting of other materials for
recycling, plastic parts, for instance, have
been marked to identify the precise nature
of the plastic.
The quantity of materials in the car that can
be recycled or recovered depends on the
scrapping facilities in different countries. EU
legislation that comes into force in 2006 will
require a minimum of 85 % of the total
weight of materials to be recycled. How-
ever, every major car salvage yard in each
market will receive details from Saab of how
the highest percentage of materials can be
reclaimed.
249Car care and technical information
1 A-pillar trim: PP, PP/EPDM
2 Windshield trim: PP, PP/EPDM
3 Seals: EPDM
4 C-pillar trim: ABS
5 Rear light cluster: PMMA
6 Rear bumper, cellular core: expanded PP;
sheathing: PP/EPDM
7 Side-window casing: PP/EPDM
8 Fuel tank: PE
9 Side trim: PVC
10 A-pillar upholstery trim: PC/ABS, textile
11 Rearview mirror: ABS
12 Sill scuff plate: PP/EPDM
13 Wheel-arch liner: PP
14 Wheel cover: PA
15 Direction-indicator lamp lens: PMMA
16 Washer-fluid reservoir: PE
17 Front spoiler: PP/EPDM
18 Front bumper, cellular core: expanded PP;
sheathing, grille: PP/EPDM
19 Fan shroud: PP
20 Scuttle panel finisher: PC/ASA
IB1801
ABS Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
ASA Acrylonitrile-styrene (acrylic
plastic)
EPDM Ethylene-propylene rubber
PA Polyamide (plastic)
PC Polycarbonate (plastic)
PE Polyethylene
PMMA Polymethyl methacrylate
POM Acetal plastic
PPO Polyphenylene oxide (plastic)
PP Polypropylene
PUR Polyurethane
PVC Polyvinyl chloride
1
2
34
5
6
8
7
9
10
11
12131415
18
17
19
16
20
250 Car care and technical information
Headlight aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlight
aiming system equipped with vertical
aiming device. The aim has been preset at
the factory and should normally not need
further adjustments.
If your headlights are damaged in a crash,
the headlight aim may be affected. If you
believe your headlights need to be
re-aimed, we recommend that you take it to
your Saab dealer for service, however, it is
possible for you to re-aim your headlights as
described in the following procedure.
To check the aim, the vehicle should be
properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle shall be placed so that the
headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light
colored wall or other flat surface. The
aiming area should be darkened, this will
improve your ability to see the beam of the
low beam headlight being aimed.
• The vehicle must have all four wheels on
a perfectly level surface which is level all
the way to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is per-
pendicular to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel
tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
(75 kg) on the drivers seat.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled
and all other work stopped while headlight
aiming is being done.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice
or mud attached to it.
• Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
pressure.
• Close all doors.
• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-
sion.
Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle
low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will
be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps
are aimed properly.
WARNING
Before checking/adjusting the headlight
aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
danger of fingers and hands being injured
by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when
the engine is switched off.
NOTICE
To make sure that your headlights are
aimed properly read all instructions
before beginning. Failure to follow these
instructions could cause damage to
headlight parts or a not correctly aimed
headlight.
251Car care and technical information
If you find that the headlight needs adjust-
ment follow these steps:
1 Open the hood and locate the vertical
aiming device.
2 Locate the marker on the lens.
3 Measure the distance from the ground to
the aim marker on each lens.
Subtract 2 inches if the vehicle is
equipped with halogen lamps, record
this distance.
Subtract 3 inches if the vehicle is
equipped with xenon lamps, record this
distance.
4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure
from the ground to the recorded dis-
tance (see point 4) and draw a horizontal
line the width of the vehicle.
IB1950
2
1
4 3
1 Wall or garage door
2 25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.
3 Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.
4 Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches for vehicles with halogen lamps and
3 inches for vehicles with xenon lamps.
IB1951
Vertical aiming device
IB1952
Aiming marker on headlight lens
252 Car care and technical information
5 Turn on the low beam headlights and
place a piece of cardboard or equivalent
(although not directly on the lens) in front
of the headlight not being aimed. This
should allow the beam cut-off of the
headlight being aimed to be seen on the
flat surface.
6 Turn the vertical aiming screw until the
horizontal cut-off of the headlight is
aligned with the horizontal line on the
wall.
NOTICE
Do not cover a headlight directly on the
lens to improve beam cut-off when aim-
ing. Covering a headlight may cause
excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlight.
IB1953
Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface
IB1954
Correctly adjusted low beam
253Maintenance and owner assistance
Maintenance and
owner assistance
Maintenance schedule..... 254
Owner assistance ............ 255
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S.A.) ............................ 256
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
government .................... 256
IB1941
254 Maintenance and owner assistance
Maintenance schedule
The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a
service program to the purchaser/operator
of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary
to ensure the proper emission control sys-
tems function, safety and reliability of the
Saab automobile in normal use. Additional
maintenance is recommended for specific
components when the car is operated under
certain severe conditions. Proper mainte-
nance is always good advice!
Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and
trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.
They regularly receive up-to-date Saab ser-
vice manuals and parts and technical ser-
vice bulletins from Saab and are able,
through their franchise agreement, to attend
Saab service schools, obtain Saab special
tools and technical assistance and pur-
chase original equipment service and
replacement parts.
Today’s complex automobiles should only
be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
service professionals. A Saab dealer is your
best choice.
Service intervals
The maintenance schedule is comprised of
a Check -up 30 days after retail delivery, fol-
lowed by services at every 10,000 miles
(16,000 km) thereafter (10,000, 20,000,
30,000 miles/16,000 32,000, 48,000 km
etc.).
Engine oil and filter changes
Changing the engine oil and filter is required
at every service point. Use only a Saab
approved long-life oil filter and engine oils
meeting the SAE viscosity ratings and API
service classifications stated in the Specifi-
cation section of this Owner’s Manual. The
use of extra additives in the oil is not neces-
sary and is not recommended, and may be
harmful to turbochargers.
More frequent oil changes are recom-
mended if your vehicle is operated under
the following conditions:
• Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to
16 km). This is particularly important
when outside temperatures are below
freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such
as frequent stop-and-go driving).
• Most trips are through dusty areas.
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a car-
rier on top of your vehicle.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service,
police, taxi or other commercial applica-
tions.
If your driving habits match this description,
have the engine oil and filter changed in-
between normal services at 5,000 mile
(8,000 km) intervals. The Warranties and
Service Record Booklet has provisions to
record extra oil changes.
NOTICE
The Check-up will be done by your Saab
dealer at no charge and should be done
as close as possible to the scheduled 30
days.
255Maintenance and owner assistance
Service record retention
Service instruction coupons and record
stubs are provided in the Saab Warranties
and Service Record Booklet which accom-
panies this Owner’s Manual. The coupons
are arranged in the order that normal ser-
vice should be performed. The edge of each
coupon is shaded to correspond to the type
of service point:
• Striped – "Check Up"
• Blue – Oil change/inspection service
• Black – Major service
Note that in Canada a combined service
and warranty book is used, but not service
coupons.
When scheduled services are performed,
your dealer will tear out the applicable
coupon and use it to check off the opera-
tions performed and enter it into the service
file at the dealership. The servicing dealer’s
stamp, along with the date and mileage at
which the service was done, should be
entered on the corresponding stub which
remains in your booklet. The booklet is your
permanent record of the services per-
formed. It also includes a log sheet for
unscheduled repairs.
It is advisable to retain receipts and, if pos-
sible, copies of shop work orders for all ser-
vice and repair work, wherever performed.
Service costs
Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-
vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-
vice times for each service point do not
include the labor required to replace wear
items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
repairs found to be necessary as a result of
the inspections included in these times.
Additional labor and parts will be charged
for such work when necessary, except as
covered under an applicable Saab warranty
or any optional extended service contract.
Transmission fluid changes or suspension
alignment, when necessary, are also addi-
tional.
Dealer charges for general shop material,
regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-
cling expenses or other operation costs may
also be applied to service and repair
invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
locality.
Owner assistance
Warranties and service problem
assistance
For complete information about all applica-
ble warranties, including the New Car War-
ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis-
sion Warranty and Emission Perforation
Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-
vice Record Booklet which accompanies
this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
assistance information including Saab
Roadside Assistance. If the booklet is lost or
misplaced, a new one may be ordered
through a Saab dealer or by contacting
Saab.
In the U.S. there is a national Customer
Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.
The toll-free number to call from all 50 states
is 1-800-955-9007.
In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A list of authorized Saab sales and service
dealers is available for those planning to
travel in the United States and Canada.
Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
Customer Assistance Center in the country
in which they are traveling.
256 Maintenance and owner assistance
Change of Address Notification
(U.S. and Canada)
Two change of address cards are provided
at the end of the Warranties and Service
Record Booklet. Knowing your current
address allows Saab to contact you in the
event of a recall or service campaign.
Please help us keep our records up to date
for your own peace of mind.
Service information
Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-5
car line can be ordered through the dealer.
These are comprehensive manuals on CD
rom, geared to use by professional techni-
cians.
Consult your Saab dealer for prices and for
a listing for your model.
Reporting Safety
Defects (U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-
9393 (or 202/366-0123 in Washington D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department
of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
Reporting Safety
Defects to the Canadian
government
If you live in Canada, and believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in
addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited.
You may write to Transport Canada at Box
8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
In addition to notifying Transport Canada in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you
will notify us. In Canada, please call our
Saab Customer Assistance Centre at
1-800-263- 1999.
Or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Centre,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.
257Specifications
Specifications
General.............................. 258
Engine............................... 260
Fuel.................................... 260
Engine oil.......................... 261
Engine variants ................ 262
Electrical system.............. 263
Drive belts......................... 263
Manual gearbox................ 264
Automatic transmission.. 264
Suspension....................... 265
Steering............................. 265
Brake system.................... 265
Wheels and tires .............. 267
Plates and labels.............. 269
IB603
258 Specifications
General
Overall length, including bumpers:
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 190.0 in (4827 mm)
9-5 Wagon ______________________ 190.1 in (4828 mm)
Overall width, including door mirrors ____ 80.4 in (2042 mm)
Maximum height:
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 58.1 in (1475 mm)
9-5 Wagon ______________________ 59.1 in (1501 mm)
Wheelbase _______________________ 106.4 in (2703 mm)
Ground clearance __________________ approx. 6.6 in
(167 mm)
Track:
Front __________________________ 59.9 in (1522 mm) *)
Rear ___________________________ 59.9 in (1522 mm) *)
Turning circle (curb to curb) ___________ 37,1 ft (11.3 m)
Turning circle (measured at vehicle extrem-
ities) ___________________________ 39,0 ft (11.9 m)
Number of seats (incl. driver) _________ 5
*)
Specified track applies to wheel sizes:
6 x 15 & 6.5 x 16
Gross vehicle weight
(GVW)
Maximum train
weight
(GVW + max. trailer
weight)
Maximum axle load,
front
Maximum axle load,
rear
Permissible load (in addition to driver) = GVW minus curb weight
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
Chassis number in engine bay
Weight ready for driving (i.e. with full fuel
tank, washer-fluid reservoir, standard
tools and spare wheel) ______________ 3370–3790 lbs.
(1530–1720 kg)
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) ___________ 4370–4720 lbs.
(1980–2140 kg)
Maximum axle load:
Front ___________________________ 2590 lbs. (1175 kg)
Rear, 9-5 Sedan___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)
Rear, 9-5 Wagon __________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
Weight distribution:
Curb weight, front/rear ______________ 60/40 %
GVW, front/rear ___________________ 50/50 %
Maximum roof load __________________ 220 lbs (100 kg)
IB1917
259Specifications
Trailer:
Luggage compartment
Volume (SAE):
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 15.9 cu.ft.
(450 litres)
9-5 Wagon, rear seat upright ________ 31.4 cu. ft.
(890 litres)
9-5 Wagon, rear seat folded _________ 73.0 cu. ft.
(2067 litres)
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Sedan:
Rear seat upright _________________ 43.0 in (1092 mm)
Rear seat folded down _____________ 67.5 in (1714 mm)
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Wagon:
Rear seat upright _________________ 42.8 in (1087 mm)
Rear seat folded __________________ 61.2 in (1732 mm)
WARNING
• The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are
fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of
these.
• When carrying a load in the luggage compartment, make sure
that it is tied down securely, particularly when part or all of the
rear seat is folded down.
Maximum towing speed, trailer with brakes 60 mph (100 km/h)
Trailer with brakes _________________ Maximum weight:
3500 lbs (1588 kg)
Trailer without brakes ______________ Maximum weight:
1000 lbs (450 kg)
Maximum load on ball hitch __________ 110–165 lbs
(50–75 kg)
The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by
Saab Automobile AB.
Note that local restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and
weights (see page 181).
260 Specifications
Engine Fuel
4-cylinder ________________________ Four cylinders, twin
overhead cam-
shafts, 16 valves
and two balancer
shafts.
3.0t V6 ___________________________ V-6 engine, double
overhead cam-
shafts on each cyl-
inder bank,
24 valves
Cylinder bores ___________________ 3.54 in (90 mm)
Stroke:
4-cylinder engine _________________ 3.54 in (90 mm)
3.0t V6 _________________________ 3.34 in (85 mm)
Swept volume
4-cylinder engine _________________ 139.7 cu.in
(2.290 litres)
3.0t V6 _________________________ 180.6 cu.in
(2.962 litres)
Idling speed
4-cylinder _______________________ 825 rpm
3.0t V6 _________________________ 700 rpm
Antifreeze ________________________ Saab-approved
antifreeze
Coolant capacity
4-cylinder _______________________ 7.6 qts (7.4 litres)
3.0t V6 _________________________ 7.4 qts (7.2 litres)
Fuel grade ________________________ Unleaded gasoline
AON 87–93.
The use of fuel with an octane rating lower than that
recommended can cause serious engine damage.
For optimum performance Saab recom-
mend the following fuel grades:
2.3t_____________________________ AON 90
2.3 Turbo Aero and 3.0t V6 __________ AON 93 *)
*) If AON 90 is used and the ambient temperature is above
77 – 86°F (25– 30°C) some decrease in engine power can occur
to some extent.
Fuel-tank capacity __________________ 18.5 gal. (70 litres)
261Specifications
Engine oil
Oil recommendation:
We recommend the use of Saab or Mobil oils, available from
your Saab dealer, for regular oil changes. These oils fulfil
Saab’s requirements as wells as the most stringent require-
ments set by API and ACEA classifications.
Basic recommendations for Saab engines:
SAE 5W-30 or 0W-30, 5W-40.
The oil should be semi or fully synthetic and fulfill grade require-
ments for ACEA A3/B3, API SJ or higher. In addition to API and
ACEA the ILSAC GF-3 specification is approved for use in appli-
cable markets.
Fully synthetic oils with viscosity’s 0W-40/50 of well known
brands and fulfilling minimum ACEA A3/B3 are also recom-
mended, especially for extreme driving conditions.
Oil specification.
Oil for gasoline engines is classified by the API (American Petro-
leum Institute) and ACEA (European Automobile Manufacturers
Associations) standards.
API classifies engine oil into grade classes SH (since 1993) and
SJ (since 1996). The SJ class fulfils more stringent requirements
and has lower phosphorous level. A new grade API SL, intro-
duced 2001, fulfils even higher requirements.
These grade classes are most often combined with correspond-
ing classes for diesel engines. The class designations for diesel
engines begins with the letter "C" (Commercial). For example a
grade combination suitable for both types of engine could be API
SJ/CF or SL/CF.
Under the ACEA nomenclature, oils are divided into Class A for
gasoline engines and Class B for diesel engine passenger cars.
There is a further class for heavy diesel engines. Each class is
divided into grades: 1,2 and 3 where grades 2 and 3 normally
encompass semi- and fully synthetic oils. The diesel class also
has a fourth grade, B4, which encompasses tests and regula-
tions aimed at improving the performance of direct injection die-
sel engines.
In the same way as in the API system, gasoline and diesel
engine specifications are combined for products that can be
used in both types of engine. For example, a grade designation
could be ACEA A2/B2 or ACEA A3/B3, B4.
262 Specifications
Engine variants
Viscosity
:
The viscosity of oil is classified according to the SAE standard.
Nowadays, multigrade oils are always used in cars. The proper-
ties of these oils facilitate starting the car in cold weather but
mean that the oil is also viscous enough to coat al moving parts
under high pressures and with high outside air temperatures.
Multigrade oils are graded with two viscosity’s, e.g. 5W-30,
where 5W meets certain viscosity requirements at –4°F (–20°C),
while 30 fulfils requirements at 212°F (100°C).
Oil capacity incl. filter (on changing):
4-cylinder _______________________ 4.1 qts (4.0 litres)
3.0t V6 _________________________ 4.6 qts (4.5 litres)
2.3t Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 185 hp (136 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1800 rpm____ 206.5 ft.lb
(280 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1
2.3 Turbo Ecopower (”Aero” model engine)
Rating, EEC at 5300 rpm ____________ 250 hp (184 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1900 rpm 258.0 ft.lb.
(350 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1
3.0t V6 Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5000 rpm ____________ 200 hp (147 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 2500 rpm____ 229 ft.lb
(310 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.5:1
263Specifications
Electrical system Drive belts
Voltage __________________________ 12 V
Battery capacity ___________________ 70 Ah
Starter motor ______________________ 1.4 kW
Alternator rating
4-cylinder _______________________ 140 A/14 V
3,0t V6 _________________________ 130 A/14 V
Firing order:
4-cylinder _______________________ 1–3–4–2
3.0t V6 _________________________ 1–2–3–4–5–6
Spark plugs:
2.3t ___________________________ NGK
BCPR 6ES-11
Electrode gap ____________________ 0.0414 in (1.05 mm)
2.3 Turbo Aero ___________________ NGK
PFR 6H-10
Electrode gap ____________________ 0.0374 in (0.95 mm)
3.0t V6 _________________________ NGK
BKR 7ES-11
Electrode gap ___________________ 0.0414 in (1.05 mm)
Engine variants Outside length
4-cylinder, poly-V-belt ________________ 102.84 in
(2612 mm)
3.0t V6, poly-V-belt __________________ 79.53 in
(2020 mm)
Drive belt, 4-cylinder Drive belt, 3.0t V6
IB542
IB543
264 Specifications
Manual gearbox Automatic transmission
Type ____________________________ All-synchromesh
5-speed with final
drive and differen-
tial
Oil ______________________________ Saab MTF 0063
Oil capacity _______________________ 1.9 qts (1.8 litres)
Oil volume (on changing) ____________ 1.6 qts (1.5 litres)
Clutch type _______________________ Hydraulic, single
dry-plate clutch of
diaphragm-spring
type
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear:
4-cylinder _______________________ 27–29 / 43–47
Type _____________________________ Electronically con-
trolled 5-speed,
fully automatic with
hydraulic torque
converter, plane-
tary gear set and
integral final drive
Lock-up function in
selector positions 3,
4 and 5.
Selector-lever positions ______________ P R N D M L
Transmission-fluid capacity, dry transmis-
sion (incl. torque converter and oil cooler) 7.5 qts (7 litres)
If fluid change required, approximately
3.5 litres can be drained through the drain
plug in the transmission casing
Transmission fluid ___________________ Saab 3309 (mineral
oil based)
Clutch type ________________________ Hydraulic plate
clutches, brake
bands and one-way
couplings
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear:
4-cylinder engines and 3.0t V6 _______ 29–30 / 46–48
265Specifications
Suspension
Steering
Brake system
Spring type, front and rear ___________ Coil springs
Maximum deflection of springs:
Front __________________________ 7.09 in (180 mm)
Rear ___________________________ 7.87 in (200 mm)
Dampers, front and rear _____________ Gas-filled dampers
Steering _________________________ Power-assisted
steering of
rack-and-pinion
type; telescopic
steering-column
shaft with universal
joints
Number of turns, lock to lock __________ 2,9
Power-steering fluid ________________ Power-steering
fluid CHF 11S
Footbrake (ABS) ____________________ Hydraulic disc
brakes with vacuum
servo unit. Diago-
nally split circuits;
ventilated discs on
front wheels. EBD
function, see page
172.
Handbrake ________________________ Acts on rear wheels
Brake fluid _________________________ DOT 4
Brake-fluid capacity _________________ 0.925 qts (900 ml)
Disc diameter:
Front ___________________________ 11.34 in (288 mm)
Front, certain variants *)_____________ 12.05 in (306 mm)
Rear ___________________________ 11.26 in (286 mm)
Rear, certain variants *) _____________ 11.81 in (300 mm)
*) 15” wheel must not be used on these
variants.
Total friction area of brake pads:
Front ___________________________ 36.3 in2 (234 cm2)
Rear ___________________________ 15.5 in2 (100 cm2)
266 Specifications
Wheels and tires
(recommended dimensions)
2.3t 2.3 Turbo 3.0t V6
Summer tires
205/65 R 15 94 V X – –
215/55 R 16 93 V X X X
225/45 R 17 94 W X X X
Winter tires
195/65 R 15 91 Q X – –
205/55 R 16 91 Q X X –
215/55 R 16 93 Q X X X
Wheel sizes
6 x 15” X – –
6,5 x 16” X X X
7 x 17” X X X
15" wheels must not be fitted to the 2.3 Turbo 3.0t V6 since the size of the
brake discs prohibits this.
Speed ratings and load indices, see page 233.
Always contact an authorized Saab dealer if you wish to fit other wheels or
tires than those fitted as standard.
267Specifications
15" wheels must not be fitted to the 2.3 Turbo or 3.0t V6 since the size of the
brake discs prohibits this.
Compact spare:
Wheel__________________________ 4 x 16
Tire ____________________________ T115/70 R16
Pressure________________________ 60 psi (420 kPa)
Maximum life ____________________ 2,200 miles
(3500 km)
Maximum speed _________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)
NOTICE
Snow chains:
Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only
be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:
Wheels Tires
6 x 15*)_____205/65 R15
6.5 x 16_____205/55 R16 M+S or
215/55 R16
Snow chains must not be fitted to 17" wheels.
Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Contact an authorized Saab dealer for advice on snow chains.
NOTICE
Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.
Wheel offset must be 49 mm.
Vehicles with 12.05 in (306 mm) front brake discs must not use
15” rims.
268 Specifications
Lowest recommended tire pressure, cold tires
Tire size Load/speed
mph (km/h) 1) Front
psi/kPa Rear
psi/kPa
205/65 R15 94 V 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 33/230 30/210
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 33/230 30/210
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 41/280 38/260
215/55 R16 93 V 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 32/220
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 32/220
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 42/290 39/270
225/45 R17 94 W 1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190) 35/240 33/230
4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190) 35/240 33/230
1–5 pers./120– (190–) 43/300 42/290
195/65 R 15 91 Q 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 33/230 33/230
Winter tire
for 2.3t 4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 36/250 36/250
205/55 R16 91 Q
Winter tire.
All variants except
3.0t V6.
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 32/220 32/220
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 39/270 39/270
215/55 R16 93 Q
Winter tire.
All variants.
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 32/220 32/220
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 39/270 39/270
T115/70 R16
Spare wheel Max 50 (80) 60/420 60/420
1) Do not exceed posted speed limits.
By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the surrounding
air temperature.
The values for tire pressure in the table above are for tires at 68°F (20°C).
The tire pressure will increase as the tires become warm (e.g. during motor-
way driving), and decrease as they cool.
When the temperature of the tires increase or decrease by 10 degrees the
tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease by 2 psi/10 kPa
(0.1 bar).
269Specifications
Plates and labels
When consulting your Saab dealer, it may be
necessary to quote the car’s V.I.N., engine
and gearbox numbers.
1 Modification identity plate.
2 V.I.N. number, inside windshield.
3 Certification label.
4 Gearbox number.
5 Engine number.
6 Tire pressures and color codes
(body & trim), label.
7 Chassis number plate.
8 Chassis number, stamped on body.
9 Vehicle Emission Control Information.
IB1948
CANADAUS
270 Specifications
1 Region ___________ Y = Northern Europe
2 Country __________ S = Sweden
3 Manufacturer _____ 3 = Saab Automobile AB
4 Product line ______ E = 9-5
5 Model series ______ B = 9-5 Linear with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags
D = 9-5 Arc with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags
H = 9-5 Aero with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags
6 Body version _____ 4 =
5 = 4-door
5-door
7 Gearbox __________ 5 = Manual 5-speed
9 = Automatic 5-speed
8 Engine variant _____ E =
G =
Z =
2.3t
2.3 Turbo
3.0t V6
9 Check digit ________ 0–9/X
10 Model year ________ 3 = 2003
11 Factory ___________ 3 = Trollhättan
12 Serial number ______ 000001–999999
position:1234567891011 12
||||||||||| |
V.I.N.: YS3EF49E633045842
| | ||||
1 23456= identification codes for certain chassis details
IB1917
271Specifications
Several of the systems in your Saab
car can be adjusted to better fit your
individual needs
Some functions are governed by legal
requirements and cannot therefore be
reprogrammed.
Consult an authorized Saab dealer for fur-
ther information.
Car alarm/central locking system:
• The sound level of the siren when locking/
unlocking, HIGH or LOW.
• The number of blinks when locking/
unlocking, 1 to 7.
• Automatic locking of the trunk when the
car is driven, 1 to 8 mph (2–14 km/h), YES
or NO.
• Preclude the unlocking of the trunk while
the car is driven, YES or NO.
• Automatic locking of the trunk after
1 second–4 minutes if it has not been
opened, YES or NO.
• Automatic locking of the trunk when it is
closed, YES or NO.
• Automatic locking of all doors when the
car is driven above 7.5 mph (12 km/h),
YES or NO.
Saab Information Display:
• Outdoor temperature display can be
adjusted.
Miscellaneous:
• Select the on-time for heated rear seat.
• Coolant temperature gauge adjustment
can be increased/decreased.
• Fuel level gauge adjustment can be
increased/decreased.
• Additional sweep of the wipers after wind-
shield washer function (ON or OFF).
• Follow me home on-time can vary from 20
to 50 seconds.
• Night panel illumination deactivation
speed for the speedometer can be
adjusted.
Following adjustments can be done
by the driver:
Automatic Climate Control (ACC):
To alter the preprogrammed ”AUTO” start
up mode with your own preferences you can
manually select the desired settings for:
• Temperature.
• Fan speed.
•Air distribution.
See ”Programming I” on page 83 and ”Pro-
gramming II” on page 84.
Saab 9-5 Audio System (see page 105):
• Maximum starting volume (when the
radio is switched on).
• Telephone volume (if the car is equipped
with a phone connected to the audio sys-
tem).
• Speed dependent volume (volume
increases or decreases with vehicle
speed).
• Loudness.
Alarm system:
The glass breakage sensor can be tempo-
rarily disabled, see page 49.
Daytime Running Lights:
To disable, turn off the ignition and pull out
fuse 35, see page 228.
272 Specifications
(This page has been left blank)
273Index
Index
A
A/C system, fault diagnosis ________242
A/C system, maintenance _________242
ABS brakes ____________________172
ACC __________________________77
ACC functions ___________________80
ACC, automatic climate control ______77
ACC, calibration _________________85
ACC, condensation _______________86
ACC, programming _______________83
ACC, useful tips _________________85
Adjusting the steering wheel _______124
Adjustment, seats ________________12
Afterheater, V6-engine cars ________87
Air conditioning (A/C), fault diagnosis
and maintenance ______________242
Air distribution, ACC ______________82
Airbag _________________________33
Alarm __________________________48
Alarm functions __________________51
Alarm signals _______________ 48, 51
Alternator _____________________211
Alternator drive belt _________ 211, 263
Alternator rating ________________263
Anticorrosion treatment ___________246
Antidazzle rear-view mirror ________129
Ashtrays ______________________135
Audio System ___________________89
Audio System, quick guide _________91
Autochecking of lights on starting ____62
Automatic climate control (ACC) _____77
Automatic transmission,
technical data _________________264
Aviod theft, tip __________________195
B
Battery ________________________209
Battery charging/replacing ________210
Battery, boost starting ____________191
Belt guide ______________________17
Boost starting using jump leads ____191
Booster cushion _________________31
Brake and clutch fluid ____________207
Brake-fluid reservoir _____________207
Brakes, technical data ____________265
Bulbs, changing _________________214
Bulbs, table of __________________225
C
CD changer ____________________101
CD player ______________________99
CHECK messages _______________69
CHECKING _____________________69
Calibration, ACC _________________85
Cancelling the programmed settings __83
Car alarm ______________________48
Car care ______________________197
Cargo net, 9-5 Wagon ____________146
Carpeting, care of _______________243
Cassette player __________________96
Catalytic converter,
important considerations ________ 156
Central locking __________________ 42
Change language in SID __________ 70
Change of address notification ____ 256
Changing a wheel ______________ 237
Changing bulbs ________________ 214
Changing the wheels round _______ 233
Changing wiper blades __________ 212
Chassis number _______________ 269
Chassis number, key to __________ 270
Child safety ____________________ 23
Child safety locks, rear doors ______ 45
Child seat, integral _______________ 31
Cleaning, engine bay ____________ 245
Clock ______________________ 69, 70
Color code, body _______________ 269
Color code, trim ________________ 269
Compact spare wheel ___________ 236
Compass _____________________ 130
Condensation, ACC ______________ 86
Coolant ______________________ 206
Courtesy Headlight Feature _______ 72
Cruise control _________________ 171
Cup holder ____________________ 138
D
DICE/TWICE __________________ 227
Dampers _____________________ 265
Date code, tires ________________ 235
Dim-dipped beam _______________ 71
Direction indicators ______________ 73
274 Index
Door handles ____________________42
Door mirrors ___________________125
Doors, locks & luggage compartment _41
Drive belt ______________________263
Drive belt, alternator _____________211
Drive belts, length _______________263
Driver’s seat, programmable ________14
Driving at night _________________186
Driving in hot weather ____________181
Driving with a load _______________187
E
ESP __________________________176
Electric heating seat ______________15
Electric heating, front seats _________15
Electric windows ________________131
Electrical system, technical data ____263
Electrically heated rear seat ________15
Electronic Stability Program, ESP ___176
Electronic starting interlock _________43
Emergency operation of sunroof ____133
Emission control systems _________201
Engine bay, 3.0t V6 ______________200
Engine bay, 4-cyl _______________199
Engine bay, cleaning _____________245
Engine number _________________269
Engine oil, grade ________________261
Engine, description _________ 202, 203
Engine, technical data ____________260
Engine, temperature gauge ________63
Engine-oil level, checking _________203
Expansion tank, coolant __________206
F
Fault codes, Audio System ________109
Flat spot, tire ___________________241
Fluid level, automatic transmission __205
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan ____139
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon ___142
Frequently asked questions on airbag 39
Front fog lights __________________74
Frost warning ___________________66
Fuel __________________________158
Fuel consumption ________________65
Fuel filler door __________________150
Fuel gauge _____________________63
Fuel grade _____________________260
Fuse box under hood ____________230
Fuse panel ____________________226
Fuses ________________________226
G
Garage door opener _____________126
Gearbox number ________________269
Gearbox oil, checking ____________205
Gearbox, technical data, __________264
Glove compartment ______________136
H
Handbrake _____________________195
Hazard warning lights _____________74
Head restraint ___________________16
Headlight flasher _________________71
Headlights _____________________ 71
Holidaying abroad ______________ 248
Hood ________________________ 198
Horn _________________________ 124
I
Ignition switch _________________ 152
Immobilizer ____________________ 43
Indicator and warning lights ________ 56
Indicator lights __________________ 56
Instrument illumination ___________ 73
Instruments and controls __________ 55
Integral child seat _______________ 31
Interior equipment ______________ 123
Interior lighting _________________ 134
Interior rearview mirror __________ 125
J
Jack _________________________ 239
K
Key __________________________ 42
Key to chassis number __________ 270
Key, remove __________________ 152
L
LATCH (child safety) _____________ 24
Labels _________________________ 8
Leather upholstery, care of _______ 243
Light horn _____________________ 71
275Index
Light switches ___________________71
Luggage-compartment lighting _____134
M
Main instrument panel _____________56
Main/dipped beam _______________71
Maintenance schedule ___________254
Manual gearbox, technical data ____264
Maxi fuses _____________________227
Milometer ______________________62
Motoring abroad ________________248
N
Night Panel _____________________69
O
Oil capacity, engine ______________260
Oil change, engine ______________204
Oil specification _________________260
OnStar ________________________111
Outdoor temperature ______________65
Owner assistance _______________255
P
Paintwork, touching-in ____________245
Parking Assistance ______________193
Parking lights ___________________71
Plates and labels ________________269
Poly-V-belt ____________________211
Power steering _________________208
Power-steering fluid _____________208
Pressure gauge __________________64
Programming I, ACC ______________83
Programming II, ACC _____________84
Programming the ACC ____________83
Q
Questions on function of airbag _____39
Quick guide, Audio System _________91
R
Radiator fan ____________________211
Radio __________________________94
Rain sensor _____________________75
Rear fog light ____________________72
Rear seat, 9-5 Sedan, folding ______139
Rear seat, 9-5 Wagon, folding _____142
Rear-seat head restraints __________16
Rear-view mirror, antidazzle _______129
Rearview mirrors ________________125
Reclamation ___________________248
Recommendations for cars with
automatic transmission,
towing a caravan or trailer ________182
Refuelling _____________________158
Relay panel ____________________229
Remote control __________________42
Remote-control battery, changing ____45
Remove the key ________________152
Reporting safety defects __________256
Reprogramming of systems _______271
Reservoir, power-steering fluid ____ 208
Rev counter ____________________ 62
Reversing lights _________________ 74
Roof load _____________________ 185
Running-in ____________________ 178
S
SID __________________________ 65
Saab 9-5 Audio System ___________ 89
Saab Information Display (SID) _____ 65
Saab Parking Assistance ________ 193
Safety belts ____________________ 17
Safety belts, care of _____________ 243
Safety-belt pretensioners _________ 18
Safety-belt reminder _____________ 17
Seats _________________________ 12
Securing a load _________________ 46
Selector lever indication,
automatic transmission __________ 65
Sentronic, manual mode _________ 167
Service costs __________________ 255
Service information _____________ 256
Service intervals _______________ 254
Service record retention _________ 255
Settings, seats __________________ 12
Side airbags ___________________ 36
Signalling, horn ________________ 124
Sliding floor, 9-5 Wagon _________ 147
Snow chains __________________ 179
Spare wheel __________________ 236
Spare wheel and tools ___________ 149
Spark plugs ___________________ 263
276 Index
Speed rating ___________________232
Speedometer _______________ 62, 63
Starting in cold weather, ACC _______83
Starting in hot weather, ACC _______83
Steering wheel adjustment ________124
Steering, technical data __________265
Stone-chip damage, repairing ______245
Storage compartments ___________136
Sun visors _____________________135
Sunroof _______________________132
Suspension ____________________265
Suspension, technical data ________265
Switches _______________________71
Symbols _______________________10
Systems, adjustment _____________271
T
TCS OFF _______________________61
Table of fuses __________________228
Tachometer _____________________62
Tailgate, opening ________________46
Tank gauge _____________________63
Technical data __________________257
Telematics _____________________111
Temperature control, ACC _________79
Temperature gauge, engine ________63
Temperature zones, ACC __________79
Textile carpeting ________________243
Through-load hatch ______________141
Tie Downs _____________________141
Tightening torque, wheel studs _____237
Tip, driving at night ______________186
Tip, to avoid theft ________________195
Tire markings _____________ 232, 233
Tire pressure ______________ 187, 232
Tires ____________________ 232, 267
Tires, winter ____________________266
Tools _________________________149
Touching-in the paintwork _________245
Towbar attachment ______________181
Towbar load ___________________184
Towing the car __________________189
Towing, automatics ______________189
Traction _______________________175
Trailer weights __________________259
Trionic ________________________201
Trip computer ___________________65
Trip meter ______________________62
Trunk _________________________139
Trunk lid, opening ________________46
Turbo gauge ____________________64
Turbo, points to note _____________155
U
Under the hood, 3.0t V6 __________200
Under the hood, 4-cyl ____________199
Upholstery and trim ______________243
Upholstery and trim, care of _______243
Useful tips, ACC _________________85
V
Vanity mirrors __________________135
Ventilated front seats _____________15
Viscosity, engine oil ______________260
W
Warning labels ___________________ 8
Warning light, AIR BAG ___________ 38
Warning lights __________________ 56
Washers _____________________ 212
Washers, windshield ____________ 213
Washing the car _______________ 244
Waxing and polishing ___________ 245
Wear indicators, tires ____________ 234
Wheel, change ________________ 237
Wheels and tires ___________ 232, 267
Wheels and tires, sizes __________ 266
Window glass sensor, car alarm ____ 49
Windshield washers _____________ 75
Windshield wipers _______________ 75
Winter tires ___________________ 266
Wiper blades, replacing __________ 212
Wipers and washers _________ 75, 212
277Notes
Notes
278 Notes
279Notes
280 Notes
281Notes
282 Notes
283Notes
284 Notes
285Notes
286 Notes
287Notes
288 Notes

Navigation menu